Simocode Manual

SIMOCODE pro

System Manual Version 10/2004

siriusTotally

IntegratedAutomation

MOTOR MANAGEMENT

Important Notes, Table of Contents

System Description 1

Short Instructions for Con-figuring a Reversing Starter

2

Motor Protection 3

Motor Control 4

Monitoring Functions 5

Outputs 6

Inputs 7

Standard Function Blocks 8

Logic Modules 9

Communication 10

Mounting, Wiring and Inter-faces

11

Commissioning and Servicing 12

Tables A

Data Formats and Data Records

B

Dimension Drawings C

Technical Data D

SIMOCODE pro

System Manual

Edition 10/2004

Order Number: 3UF7970-0AA00-0

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety as well as to avoid property damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring to property damage only have no safety alert symbol.

Danger

indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Warning

indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Caution

used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

Caution

used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.

Notice

used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.

When several danger levels apply, the notices of the highest level (lower number) are always displayed. If a notice refers to personal damages with the safety alert symbol, then another notice may be added warning of property damage.

Qualified Personnel The device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this documentation. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on the equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to earth, and to tag circuits, equipment and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Intended Use Please note the following:

Warning

This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers approved or recommended by Siemens.

This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks All designations marked with ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other designations in this documentation might be trademarks which, if used by third parties for their purposes, might infringe upon the rights of the proprietors.

Copyright Siemens AG, 2004. All rights reserved Reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.

Disclaimer of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in the manual are reviewed regularly, and any necessary corrections will be included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed.

Siemens AG Automation and Drives Group P.O. Box 4848, D-90327 Nuremberg (Germany)

Siemens AG 2004 Technical data subject to change

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00248055-02

Table of Contents

Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21.2 Simplify configuration with SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41.3 Application example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61.4 Checklist for selecting the device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81.5 Function overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101.5.1 Protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101.5.2 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101.5.3 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131.5.4 Standard function modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131.5.5 Operating, service and diagnostic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141.5.6 Additional signal processing with freely programmable logic modules . . . 1-151.6 Overview of system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161.7 Description of the system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191.7.1 Basic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191.7.2 Operator panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-201.7.3 Current measurement modules (IM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-211.7.4 Current/voltage measurement modules (UM)

for the SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-221.7.5 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series . . . . . . . . . 1-231.7.6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-251.7.7 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-261.8 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-271.8.1 Function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

2 Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Introduction and target of the example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station . . . . . . . . . 2-32.3 Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.4 Extending the reversing starter with a control station via PROFIBUS DP . . 2-10

3 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.2 Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43.3 Asymmetry monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93.4 Blocking protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103.5 Temperature monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

4 Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.1.2 Modes of operation and mode selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 i

Table of Contents

4.1.3 Enables and enabled control command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84.1.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.2 Control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.2.2 General settings and definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134.2.3 Overload relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164.2.4 Direct starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-174.2.5 Reversing starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-194.2.6 Circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224.2.7 Star-delta starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-254.2.8 Star-delta starters with reversal of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . 4-284.2.9 Dahlander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-324.2.10 Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-354.2.11 Pole-changing switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-384.2.12 Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation . . . . . . . . 4-414.2.13 Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-444.2.14 Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-464.2.15 Soft starters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-514.2.16 Soft reversing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-534.3 Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal

of the control functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56

5 Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Earth-fault monitoring via current/voltage measurement module . . . . . . . 5-25.1.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.1.2 Internal earth fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.2 Current limit monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35.2.2 I> (upper limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55.2.3 I< (lower limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65.3 Operation monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75.3.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75.3.2 Operating hours monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85.3.3 Stop time monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85.3.4 Monitoring the number of starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

6 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26.2 Basic unit (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46.3 Operator panel (OP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66.4 Digital modules (DM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86.5 Cyclic signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106.6 Acyclic signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

7 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27.2 Basic unit (BU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47.3 Digital modules (DM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67.4 Cyclic controlling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

SIMOCODE pro

ii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Table of Contents

7.5 Acyclic controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

8 Standard Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28.2 Test/reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38.3 Test position feedback (TPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78.4 External fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98.5 Operational protection OFF (OPO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-118.5.1 Response for slider control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-118.5.2 Response to other control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-138.7 Emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-158.8 Watchdog (bus monitoring, PLC/DCS monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-168.9 Timestamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-188.9.1 Time stamping in the fault memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

9 Logic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29.2 Truth table for 3I/1O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39.3 Truth table for 2I/1O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69.4 Truth table for 5I/2O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79.5 Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89.6 Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-109.7 Signal conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-139.8 Non-volatile elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-169.9 Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-199.10 Flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-209.11 Limit monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

10 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-210.1.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-210.2 Transmitting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-410.3 Configuring SIMOCODE pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-610.3.1 Configuring with a GSD file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-610.3.2 Configuring with the SIMOCODE ES software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-810.3.3 Configuring with SIMATIC PDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-810.4 Telegram description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-910.5 Process image (cyclic data) and data records (acyclic data) . . . . . . . . . . 10-1010.6 Diagnostics with STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1110.6.1 Reading out the diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1110.6.2 Configuring the slave diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1210.6.3 Station status 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1310.6.4 Master PROFIBUS address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1510.6.5 Manufacturer's identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1510.6.6 Identification-related diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1610.6.7 Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1710.6.8 Channel-related diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1810.6.9 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1910.6.10Data records - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 iii

Table of Contents

11 Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 General information about mounting and wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-211.2 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-311.2.1 Mounting the basic units and expansion modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-311.2.2 Mounting the current measurement modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-411.2.3 Mounting the operator panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-511.3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-611.3.1 Detachable terminals for basic units and expansion modules . . . . . . . . . 11-611.3.2 Current measurement with current measurement modules . . . . . . . . . . 11-911.4 System interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1011.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1011.4.2 Basic units, expansion modules and current measurement modules . . . . 11-1211.4.3 Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1411.4.4 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1611.5 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17

12 Commissioning and Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 General information about commissioning and servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . 12-212.2 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-312.2.1 Sequence of steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-312.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-412.2.3 Diagnostics via LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-512.3 Servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-612.3.1 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-612.3.2 Saving the parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-712.3.3 Replace SIMOCODE pro components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-912.3.4 Configuring the basic factory default setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

A Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.1 Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls andstatus signals/messages for the control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3A.3 Socket assignment table - digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4A.4 Socket assignment table - analog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11A.5 Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13

B Data Formats and Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

B.1 Handling data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2B.1.1 Writing/reading data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2B.1.2 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3B.1.3 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3B.2 Data record 67 - process image of the outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4B.3 Data record 69 - process image of the inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5B.4 Data record 92 - device diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6B.5 Data record 94 - measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14B.6 Data record 95 - Service/statistics data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15B.7 Data record 130 - base device parameter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16B.8 Data record 131 - base device parameter 2 (plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22

SIMOCODE pro

iv GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Table of Contents

B.9 Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26B.10 Data record 133 - extended device parameter 2 (plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-34B.11 Data record 139 - labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37B.12 Data record 160 - communication parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38B.13 Data record 165 - comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38B.14 Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39B.15 Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40B.16 Data record 224 - password protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41

C Dimension Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

C.1 3UF70 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7 000 basic unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7 010 basic unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2C.2 3UF710 current measurement module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3C.2.1 Current measurement module (push-through converter)

3UF7 100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7 101, 2.4 A up to 25 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3C.2.2 Current measurement module (push-through converter)

3UF7 102, 10 A to 100 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4C.2.3 Current measurement module (push-through converter)

3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5C.2.4 Current measurement module (rail connection)

3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6C.2.5 Current measurement module (rail connection)

3UF7 104, 63 A to 630 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7C.3 3UF7 200 operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8C.4 3UF7 3 digital module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9C.5 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10C.5.1 Door adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

D Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

D.1 Common technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2D.2 Basic units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3D.3 Current measurement modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5D.4 Expansion modules (digital modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6D.5 Operator panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7D.6 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders

for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8

Index

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 v

Table of Contents

SIMOCODE pro

vi GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Important Notes

Purpose of the manual

The SIMOCODE pro system manual describes in detail the motor manage-ment system and its functions. It contains information about configuring, commissioning, service and maintenance. The user is introduced to the system quickly and practically using a typical reversing-motor application as an example.This manual contains information specific to service and maintenance per-sonnel in addition to assistance in fault detecting and elimination when a fault occurs.The manual contains circuit diagrams, dimension drawings, and technical data about the system components to help with the configuration.

Required basic knowledge

A basic knowledge in the areas of low-voltage controls and distribution, digi-tal circuit engineering and automisation technology is required in order to be able to understand this manual.

Topics

The manual consists of chapters that can be consulted and the following table contains a list of the relevant topics. The topics with a gray background represent the contents of the “SIMOCODE ES” parameterization and ser-vice software.

Topic Target group

System Description Configurators, planers

Short Instructions for Configuring a Rever-sing Starter

Configurators, technicians and commissio-ners

Motor Protection Configurators, commissioners

Motor Control Configurators

Monitoring Functions Configurators, commissioners, service personnel

Inputs Configurators

Outputs Configurators

Standard Function Blocks Configurators

Logic Modules Configurators

Communication Configurators, PLC programmers

Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces Technicians, electricians, maintenance and service personnel

Commissioning and Servicing Commissioners, electricians, maintenance and service personnel

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 vii

Scope of application

This manual is applicable for the components included in the SIMOCODE pro system. It contains a description of the components that are applicable at the time of printing the document. We reserve the right to include information about new components or new versions of components in an additional document.

Further documentation

• Please read the operating manuals of the corresponding components.• The DP-Master manual is also required in addition to this system manual.

Definitions

• If “SIMOCODE pro” is referred to, then both the “SIMOCODE pro C” and the “SIMOCODE pro V” series are meant.

Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro

Using SIMOCODE, specific responses (deactivated, signal, warn, switch off) can be parameterized for various functions (e.g. overload). They are also dis-played in the following table:• “X” = applicable• “-” = not applicable• “d” = default

Short description of the response• Deactivated: The corresponding function is switched off, no signals are gene-

rated.• Signal: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further pro-

cessed in any way.• Warn: A warning signal, which is available as a diagnostic for PROFIBUS DP, is

generated in addition to the device-internal signal.• Switch off: The contactor controls QE* are switched off. An error message is

generated which is available as a diagnostic for PROFIBUS DP. The error mes-sage and the device-internal signal remain on until the corresponding time has elapsed or the cause of the error has been eliminated and acknowledged.

A delay time can also be specified for specific responses.

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Switch off - X (d) X

Warn X (d) X -

Signal X X -

Not active X X X (d)

Delay 25 s - -

SIMOCODE proviii GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Correction sheet

A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to fill in suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections and send it back to us. This helps us to improve the next edition.

Exclusion of liability

The products described here were developed to carry out protection tasks as part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety system consists of sensors, evaluation units, signaling devices and methods for safe switching off. It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure the safe functioning of the complete plant or machine.Siemens AG, its subsiduries and associated companies (hereon referred to as "Siemens") is not in the position to guarantee every characteristic of a complete plant or machine that is not designed by Siemens.

Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are given or implied in the following description. No new guarantee, warranty or liability above those standard to Siemens can be derived from the following description.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 ix

SIMOCODEx GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description 1In this chapter

In this chapter you will find an introduction and general information about the SIMOCODE pro system including e.g.• characteristics of both the SIMOCODE pro C and the

SIMOCODE pro V device series• simplifications of circuits with SIMOCODE pro• a function overview• an overview of the system components.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• planners and configurators• people who are now using SIMOCODE DP and in the future want to use

SIMOCODE pro as a replacement or as an additional system• optional for commissioners, maintenance and service personnel as additional

information about SIMOCODE pro• system integrators/process technology.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• basic knowledge about load feeders• basic knowledge about motor protection• basic knowledge of control engineering• basic knowledge of industrial bus technology.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 1-1

System Description

1.1 Introduction

Description

SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Devices) is a system of motor management and control devices with a PROFIBUS DP interface. SIMOCODE pro is the further development of the SIMOCODE DP system.

SIMOCODE pro is a flexible, modular motor management system which combines all functions necessary for a motor feeder. Only the switching and protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors, circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed. The system protects and monitors the motor feeder independently of the automation system.SIMOCODE pro makes the motor feeder controllable in an easy way and also automatically implements all the necessary interlockings. It provides a lot of operating, service and diagnostic data making the functionality of the motor feeder more transparent. It integrates the motor feeder completely into a main automation system via PROFIBUS DP.

Device series

SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into two device series with different functions:• SIMOCODE pro C - the compact system for direct and reversing starters

and• SIMOCODE pro V - the variable system which also offers many other additio-

nal functions in addition to the SIMOCODE pro C functions

Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V for star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing switches, soft starters - each also in combi-nation with reversal of the direction of rotation, as well as valves and sliders. SIMOCODE pro V is also especially versatile. Its functionality can be extended if required, e.g.– the number of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages and are

adjustable, new types can be added– a current/voltage measurement module can be used for additional voltage

measuring and for monitoring power-related measured values (power mana-gement)

– a temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature sensors

– another earth-fault detection system can be integrated together with a sum-mation current transformer

– an analog module extends the system by an additional analog input and out-put, for example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring

SIMOCODE pro C is upwards-compatible to SIMOCODE pro V. This means that you can use both ranges simultaneously in your plant.

SIMOCODE pro

1-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

Independent operation

SIMOCODE pro C and pro V protect and control the motor feeder indepen-dently of the automation system. Thus, if the automation system (PLC) fails or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder can still be operated. SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can, for example, be connected later.

Typical configuration

The following schematic shows a typical configuration of SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V:

Figure 1-1: Typical configurations of SIMOCODE pro

UF-

0112

9

Current measurementmodule (IM)

Basic unit (BU1)

Operator panel (OP)

SIMOCODE pro C

Maximum configuration

UF-

0113

0

SIMOCODE pro V Basic unit (BU2)


Operator panel (OP)

Digital module (DM)Analog module (AM)

Additional optional expansions are possible


System Description

1.2 Simplify configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Individual components are used for all the control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. The following components must be used and the following wiring must be carried out:• inserting and wiring up the overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices,

current transformers, analog/digital converters• wiring up the control circuit• connecting the control devices for start/stop• bringing the contactor into locking mode via auxiliary switches• wiring up the interlocks

The following figure shows the conventional configuration of a direct starter:

Figure 1-2: Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

PLCStart/stop

Thermistorevaluation

Local start

Local stop

AutomaticManual-K11

1-X3

-K1

-K1S2

S1

-X2

-X1

-F3

-F2-

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- K1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

2 4 6

- F21 3 5

2 4 6

M3~ ϑ 1

PE

24...20 mA

1N

2DA

-K1 -K1 -F2 -F3

Switchgear

ON OFF

Over

load

Ther

mis

tor

Automation level / I/O module

-F3

WVU

Curre

nt

-Q1

open

-Q1

N

-K11 -K12

Feedback Control commands

Man

. / au

t.

ON /

OFF

-F4

1L1

-Q1

-K12

SIMOCODE pro

1-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Only SIMOCODE pro is used for complete control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. This offers the following advantages:• additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transfor-

mers, analog/digital converters are not necessary• wiring up the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified• the start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit• the contactor coil is activated via the output of the basic unit. The auxiliary

contact for locking is no longer necessary

The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro:

Figure 1-3: Configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter) with SIMOCODE pro

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- K1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

M3~

ϑ

PE WVU

2 4 6

Current measurmentmodule (IM)

L1/L+

F11

K1N/L–

S0 S1

A1 A2

T1 T2

T1

T2

L+

PROFIBUS DP

Thermistor

Control station -local control [LC]

Basic unit (BU)

IN1 IN2 24 V

OUT 1 1


System Description

1.3 Application example

Description

The fill level is monitored in a liquid container. A pump keeps the liquid level (reference value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container. The fill level (actual value) is measured by the fill-level indicator and output-ted as an analog signal. If the fill level sinks below a certain level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE. Liquid is pumped in until the reference value is again reached. Then the pump is switched off.

Controlling the pump

The pump can be controlled as follows:• locally: control station - local control [LC] for manual switching on and off (by

visual inspection)• in the switchgear cabinet door: control station operator panel [OP] for swit-

ching on and off manually• in the automation level: control station PLC/DCS [DP] for remote-controlled

switching on and off (automatic operation)• via SIMOCODE, by means of internal logic modules

Schematic

Figure 1-4: Schematic of a typical application example

3/N/PE ~ 50/60Hz 400/230VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- K1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

M3~

ϑ

PE WVU

2 4 6

Systeminterface


Pump

L1/L+

F11

K1N/L–

Connecting cable

S0 S1

A1 A2

T1 T2

Analog module (AM)In+ In–

Out+ Out–

Fill-level indicator

T1

T2

L+

PLC/DCS

PROFIBUS DP

Thermistor

Liquid container

Control station -local control [LC]

Control stationPLC/DCS [DP]

Control station -Operator panel

Optional:Laptop withSIMOCODE ES

Display

Basic unit (BU 2)

Motor current

IN1 IN2 24 V

OUT 1 1

SIMOCODE pro

1-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

Record, display and evaluate the measured values

The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:• pump motor current, which is measured by the current measurement module• analog value of the fill-level indicator, which is measured by the analog

module

The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro or transfer-red via PROFIBUS DP to the PLC/DCS and are evaluated there.

Optionally, e.g. a laptop can be connected to the operator panel with the SIMOCODE ES software in order to evaluate further process data locally.


System Description

1.4 Checklist for selecting the device series

The following checklist should help you decide on the best device series for your requirements:

SIMOCODE pro

Requirement pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Standard motor feeders (4 inputs, 3 outputs) with control functions for direct starters, reversing starters, intelligent overload relays

✓ ✓ 1)

Monitoring of blocking, asymmetry, phase failure ✓ ✓ 1)

Current measurement, current limit monito-ring, overload protection ✓ ✓ 1)

Earth-fault monitoring via current measure-ment module (internal) ✓ ✓ 1)

Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary)✓ ✓

Motor feeder with control function:star-delta starters, Dahlanders, pole-changing switches, soft starters – each also possible in combination with reversal of the direction of rotation –, valves, sliders

— ✓ 1)

Measuring, processing and outputting analog values e.g. flow rate, fill level, etc. — ✓ 2)

Current measurement and voltage measure-ment — ✓ 3)

Voltage monitoring for undervoltage— ✓ 3)

Power management, implementing power considerations (power, power factor), power monitoring

— ✓ 3)

More than 4 digital inputs required (maximum 12) — ✓ 2)

Table 1-1: Checklist for selecting the device series

1) via current measurement module2) with expansion modules3) via current/voltage measurement modules

SIMOCODE pro

1-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

More than 3 relay outputs required (maximum 7) — ✓ 2)

Earth-fault monitoring with a summation cur-rent transformer — ✓ 2)

Binary inputs for 110 ... 240 V AC/DC(max. 8) — ✓ 2)

Bistable relay outputs (max. 4)— ✓ 2)

Analog temperature monitoring with PTC, NTC, PT100, PT1000 and KTY sensor types — ✓ 2)

SIMOCODE pro

Requirement pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Table 1-1: Checklist for selecting the device series (cont.)

1) via current measurement module2) with expansion modules3) via current/voltage measurement modules


System Description

1.5 Function overview

1.5.1 Protecting

For a more detailed description, please see chapter 3 “Motor Protection”

Electronic overload protection

The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent motor protection:• overload protection• phase asymmetry• phase failure

Blocking protection

Please see chapter 3 "Motor Protection"

Thermistor motor protection

The basic units (BU1 and BU2) also make it possible to connect thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.

1.5.2 Monitoring

Earth-fault monitoring

The basic units have• Internal earth-fault monitoring:

For motors with a 3-cable connection, the basic unit evaluates a possible fault current/earth-fault current from the total current. Internal earth-fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in networks which are either grounded directly or grounded with a low impedance.The internal earth-fault monitoring can be activated through parameterization. It covers 2 operating cases:

– normal operating case up to 2 x Ie. The effective operating current must be smaller than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 30% of the set current Ie will be detected.

– start-up or overload operation from 2 x Ie. The effective operating cur-rent is larger than twice the set current Ie. Fault currents > 15% of the effective motor current will be detected.

Note

If you use the internal earth-fault detection for star-delta circuits, this can lead to false trippings. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

SIMOCODE pro

1-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

• External earth-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V:the earth-fault module (EM) is needed to connect an external summation cur-rent transformer (e.g 3UL22). Rated fault currents of 0.3 A / 0.5 A / 1 A are evaluated by the 3UL22 summation current transformer.A warning is triggered if the earth-fault limit is exceeded. You can set additio-nal trippings through parameterization.

If the rated fault currents are exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts either• by turning off the contactor controls QE* or• with a warning

depending on which configuration you set.

Current limit monitoring

The current limit monitoring function is used for process monitoring. Impen-ding irregularities in the system can be detected in good time: Exceeding a current limit which is still below the overload limit can e.g. indicate a dirty fil-ter on a pump or a motor mounting which is running more and more sluggis-hly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is worn-out.

Voltage monitoring

SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of voltage monitoring. A three-phase current network or a one-phase network can be monitored for undervoltage, direction of rotation (for three-phase current) or availability.

Temperature monitoring

The temperature module from SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of imple-menting an analog temperature monitoring of up to 3 sensor measuring cir-cuits.

Monitoring active power

SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of monitoring the active power,where not only the current, but also the power factor (cos phi) is taken into account.

Monitoring the power factor (cos phi)

• For monitoring the operating status of the motor• For detecting no-load operation for motors with low power (load rejection)

Monitoring analog signals

SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of reading, processing and monitoring analog signals. The analog values can be transmitted to the automation system or processed/evaluated in SIMOCODE. Any analog signal can be outputted via the analog output.


System Description

Monitoring operating hours, stop time and number of start-ups

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and the stop times of a motor in order to avoid plant down times due to failed motors because they were either running too long (wear out) or they were stopped too long a period of time.For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is necessary or even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor, the ope-rating hours and stop times can be reset. In order to avoid excessive ther-mal strain on a motor and its premature aging, the number of motor start-ups in a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.

All signals can be processed internally (limits) and/or registered by the

bus.

Control functions

Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control functions are available:

All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available and can be flexibly adapted and extended.

SIMOCODE

Control function pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Overload relays ✓ ✓ 1)

Direct starters ✓ ✓ 1)

Reversing starters ✓ ✓ 1)

Circuit breakers ✓ ✓ 1)

Star-delta starters, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

Dahlander,can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

Pole-changing switches,can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

Valves — ✓

Sliders — ✓

Soft starters, can be combined with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

1) Due to of additional requirements (e.g. power measurement), it may be necessary to select the BU2 device version.

Table 1-2: Control functions

SIMOCODE pro

1-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

1.5.3 Communication

PROFIBUS DP

SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal connection on the basic units).SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:

1.5.4 Standard function modules

Standard function modules are predefined functions which can simply be activated, e.g. time-staggered restart of the drives after a power failure. SIMOCODE pro has the following standard function modules:

Table 1-4: Standard function modules

SIMOCODE

Service pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Baud rates up to 12 MBit/s ✓ ✓

Automatic baud rate recognition ✓ ✓

Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic ser-vices (DPV1)

✓ ✓

Warnings according to DPV1 ✓ ✓

Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP — ✓

Table 1-3: PROFIBUS DP services

SIMOCODE

Standard function modules pro C

(BU1)

Number

pro V

(BU2)

Number

Test 2 2

Reset 3 3

Test position feedback (TPF) 1 1

External fault 4 6

Operational protection off (OPO) — 1

Power failure monitoring (UVO) — 1

Emergency start 1 1

Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) 1 1

Timestamping — 1


System Description

1.5.5 Operating, service and diagnostic data

SIMOCODE pro supplies a lot of operating, service and diagnostic data:

Operating data

• motor switching state• all phase currents• all phase voltages• phase asymmetry• phase cycle• motor power/cos phi• time to trip• motor temperature• remaining cooling down time• etc.

Service data

Among other things, SIMOCODE pro yields the following information for maintaining relevant data:• motor operating hours• motor stop times• number of motor starts• number of overload trippings• internal comments saved in the device• reason for switching off• signals• warnings• faults• etc.

Diagnostic data

• numerous detailed early warning signals and fault signals• device-internal error protocolling with timestamp• etc.

SIMOCODE pro

1-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

1.5.6 Additional signal processing with freely programmable logic modules

If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the logic modules which can be programmed freely. These can be used, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions.Depending on the device series, the system offers several logic modules which can be parameterized freely:

SIMOCODE

Logic module pro C

(BU1)

Number

pro V

(BU2)

Number

Truth tables 3 inputs/ 1 output 3 6

Truth tables 2 inputs/ 1 output — 2

Truth tables 5 inputs/ 2 outputs — 1

Timers 2 4

Counters 2 4

Signal conditioners 2 4

Non-volatile elements 2 4

Flashing 3 3

Flickering 3 3

Limit monitor — 4

Table 1-5: Logic modules which can be programmed freely


System Description

1.6 Overview of system components

Devices

SIMOCODE pro

Connectable

system components

pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Application

Operator panel (OP) Installation in the cabi-net door. Additional control station and display. With system interface for connec-ting a PC

Current measurement modules (IM) 0.3 A up to 3 A2.4 A up to 25 A

Current measure-ment with push-through system. Basic unit can be snapped open

Current measurement modules (IM) 10 A up to 100 A


Current measure-ment with push-through system or a rail connection system


Current measure-ment with a rail con-nection system

Current/voltage measurement modules (UM) *

0.3 A up to 3 A2.4 A up to 25 A

—Mounting only next to the basic unit, other-wise similar to the current measurement modules, also:- voltage

measurement- power measurement- power factor (cos

phi) measurement- phase cycle


10 A up to 100 A—


20 A up to 200 A—


63 A up to 630 A—

Table 1-6: System components, devices

SIMOCODE pro

1-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

Digital modules (DM)24 V DC monostable110 V up to 240 V AC/DC monosta-ble24 V DC bistable110 V up to 240 V AC/DC bistable

— Additional binary inputs and outputs. Maximum 2 DMs pos-sible

Analog module (AM) *

—Additional inputting and outputting as well as monitoring of ana-log values

Earth-fault module (EM) *

—For connecting a 3UL22 external sum-mation current trans-former for earth-fault monitoring

Temperature module (TM) *

—For monitoring tempe-rature via additional Pt100, PT1000, KTY... sensors

* Available from the middle of 2005

SIMOCODE pro

Connectable

system components

pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Application

Table 1-6: System components, devices (cont.)


System Description

Accessories

Software

For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing

SIMOCODE basic unit

Connectable

system components

pro C pro V Application

Connecting cable in 4 different lengths ranging from 0.025 m up to 2 m

For connecting system components via system interfaces

System interface cover For covering system interfaces not in use

Memory module For saving the device parameters. In the case of device repla-cement, parameteriza-tion without a PC

Addressing plug For configuring the PROFIBUS DP address without a PC

PC cable For connectingSIMOCODE pro to a PC

Door adapter For leading out the system interfacee.g. from a switchgear cabinet

Table 1-7: System components, accessories

SIMOCODE basic unit

Software components pro C pro V Application

SIMOCODE ES Smart Access via the system interface on the device

SIMOCODE ES Professionalwith Object ManagerOM SIMOCODE pro

Access via the system interface on the device and PROFI-BUS DP

SIMOCODE ES Graphic * Graphical parameteri-zation per “Drag&Drop”

* Available from the middle of 2005

Table 1-8: System components, software

SIMOCODE pro

1-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

1.7 Description of the system components

1.7.1 Basic units

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units are always required when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure width of 45 mm and are equipped with detachable terminals:

Figure 1-5: Basic units

Basic unit 1 (BU1)

Basic unit 1 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series. The following motor control functions are supported:• direct starters and reversing starters• circuit breaker activation

Basic unit 2 (BU2)

Basic unit 2 is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following motor control functions are supported:• direct starters and reversing starters• star-delta starters, also with reversal of the direction of rotation• 2 speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing switches), also with

reversal of the direction of rotation• 2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, also with reversal of the

direction of rotation• slide control• valve control• circuit breaker control• soft starter control, also with reversal of the direction of rotation

Basic unit 1 (BU1) Basic unit 2 (BU2)SIMOCODE pro C device series SIMOCODE pro V device series


System Description

Basic unit 2 offers the following options:• increasing the device functionality if necessary using expansion modules of

22.5 mm width• using a current/voltage measurement module instead of the current measure-

ment module used• additional inputs and outputs if necessary

1.7.2 Operator panel (OP)

The operator panel is often integrated into the front panels of motor control centers. It can be used with the SIMOCODE pro C device series as well as with the SIMOCODE pro V device series. It contains all the status LEDs which are on the basic units, the “test/reset” button and makes the system interface externally available.It also offers the option of controlling the motor feeder from the cabinet. For this, the operator panel is equipped with• 5 buttons, of which 4 can be parameterized freely• 10 LEDs, of which 7 can be parameterized freely

The following figure shows an operator panel:

Figure 1-6: Operator panel

The operator panel can be connected to the basic unit or to the expansion module via the system interface on the back. The voltage is supplied by the basic unit.A PC with SIMOCODE ES or the memory module and the addressing plug can be connected using the PC cable via the system interface on the front (with a cover for IP54).The power is supplied by the basic unit.

Operator panelSIMOCODE pro CSIMOCODE pro V

Device series

SIMOCODE pro

1-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

1.7.3 Current measurement modules (IM)

Current measurement modules are used with the basic units of the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V device series. The current measurement module must be selected according to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the motor). The current measurement modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with interposing transformers up to 820 A.The following figure shows the different current measurement modules:

Figure 1-7: Current measurement modules The current measurement module is connected to the basic unit via a con-necting cable which also supplies the power. Current measurement modu-les up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The basic units can be snapped directly onto the current measurement modules. The cur-rent measurement modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the stan-dard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. The current measurement module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integra-ted screw attachments.

Current measurement modulesSIMOCODE pro CSIMOCODE pro V

Device series

0.3A - 3A2.4A - 25A

10A - 100A

20A - 200A 63A - 630A


System Description

1.7.4 Current/voltage measurement modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V

device series

The SIMOCODE pro V device series offers the option of using a current/ voltage measurement module instead of a current measurement module. As well as the motor current, current/voltage measurement modules can also• monitor voltages up to 690 V• evaluate and monitor the power and power factor (cos phi)• monitor the phase cycle

The following figure shows the different current/voltage measurement modules:

Figure 1-8: Current/voltage measurement modules

The current/voltage measurement module is connected to the basic device via a connecting cable which also supplies the power. Current/voltage mea-surement modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs. The cur-rent/voltage measurement modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments which are integrated into the enclosure. Moun-ting is only possible via the internal screw attachments for the current/voltage measurement modules up to 630 A. Basic units can only be moun-ted separately next to the current/voltage measurement modules.

Current/ voltage measurement modulesSIMOCODE pro V

Device series

0.3A - 3A2.4A - 25A

10A - 100A

20A - 200A 63A - 630A

Monitoring voltages up to 690 V

SIMOCODE pro

1-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

1.7.5 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series

Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V device series. The following expansion modules are available:• digital modules (DM)• analog module (AM)• earth-fault module (EM)• temperature module (TM)

All expansion modules have the same design with an enclosure width of 22.5 mm. They are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and detachable terminals.The following figure shows an expansion module:

Figure 1-9: Expansion module

Digital modules (DM)

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs and outputs on basic unit 2, if required.For basic unit 2, the following digital modules are available:

Table 1-9: Variations of the digital modules

A maximum of two digital modules can be connected to basic unit 2, whe-reby all versions listed here can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 relay outputs.

Inputs Supply Outputs

4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 monostable relayoutputs

4 inputs 110 ... 240 V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relayoutputs

4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs

4 inputs 110 ... 240 V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs

Expansion moduleSIMOCODE pro V

Device series


System Description

Analog module (AM)

The analog module offers the option of expanding basic unit 2 by an analog input (0/4-20 mA) and one analog output (0/4-20 mA). This makes it possible to read, process and monitor analog signals. The analog values can be pro-cessed internally and transmitted to the automation system. Any analog signal of 0/4-20 mA can be outputted via the analog output.• 1 analog module can be connected to BU2• Analog input signal 0/4 to 20 mA• Analog output signal 0/4 to 20 mA

Earth-fault modules (EM)

The earth-fault module offers the option of implementing powerful external earth-fault monitoring in connection with the 3UL22 summation current transformer (makes it possible to evaluate rated fault currents of 0.3 A, 0.5 A and 1 A). In addition to the internal earth-fault monitoring function, which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro V can be expanded by an additional and more exact external earth-fault monitoring system. • 1 earth-fault module can be connected to BU2

Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding the thermistor motor protection for the SIMOCODE pro V device series by an analog tem-perature monitoring system. With this, up to 3 analog sensor measuring cir-cuits (three-wire system) can be evaluated. SIMOCODE pro V supports, among others, the PTC, NTC, KTY sensor types as well as PT100 and PT1000.• 1 temperature module can be connected to BU2

Note:

All modules can be used/connected in any sequence.

SIMOCODE pro

1-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

System Description

1.7.6 Accessories

The following figure shows accessories which are independent of the device series:

Figure 1-10: Accessories

PC cable

for the device parameterization, for connecting a PC to the system interface of a basic unit via its serial interface.

Memory module

for plugging onto the system interface and for fast reading in or out of the entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. in the case of a unit replace-ment (for this, see chapter "Replace SIMOCODE pro components" on page 12-9).

Addressing plug

for the “hardware” transfer of the PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit wit-hout a PC/programming device.

Connecting cable

in different lengths (0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.5 m, 2.0 m) which are required for connecting the individual basic units with their current modules and, if necessary, with their expansion modules or operator panel. The total length of all connecting cables must not exceed 3 m per system!

Door adapter

for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an easily accessi-ble location (e.g. front panel), thus guaranteeing fast parameterization.

System interface cover

to protect the system interfaces from dirt or to seal them. In normal opera-tion, system interfaces which are not used must be closed.

PC cable

Memory module

Addressing plug

Connecting cable

System interfacecover

SIMOCODE pro CSIMOCODE pro V

Device series

Door adapter


System Description

1.7.7 Software

SIMOCODE pro offers different software tools for thorough, time-saving parameterization, configuration and diagnostics:

SIMOCODE ES

SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro, which is runnable on a PC/programming device under Win-dows 2000 or Windows XP. It is available in 2 versions:• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for directly connecting the PC/programming device

(serial interface) to SIMOCODE pro with a PC cable via the system interface on the device (point to point)

• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for connecting one or more devices via PROFIBUS DP and/or with PC cable via the system interface on the device

Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro

Part of SIMOCODE ES Professional. When SIMOCODE ES Professional and the OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC/programming device, SIMOCODE ES Professional can be called directly from Step7 HW configu-ration. Thus, a simple and thorough SIMATIC-S7 configuration is made pos-sible.

PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro

With the PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro, SIMOCODE pro can be connected easily and conveniently to the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system.The PCS-7 library SIMOCODE pro contains• the corresponding diagnostic and driver blocks with the diagnostic and driver

concept of SIMATIC PCS 7• the elements necessary for operator control and process monitoring (sym-

bols and faceplate)

Attention!

Please observe the respective system versions!

GSD File

for the integration into SIMATIC S7 or into any DP standard master system (automation system). The GSD file is on the SIMOCODE ES CD ROM in the “GSD” directory. You will find the current German version on the Internet underhttp://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_d/gsd (under Schaltgeräte, i.e. switchgear).You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the docu-mentation for the automation system.

Win SIMOCODE DP Converter

is a software tool for converting “old” Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files (3UF5 device series) into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.

SIMOCODE pro

1-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/de/10805317/133100.

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/de/10805317/133100.

System Description

1.8 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro

1.8.1 Function blocks

Characteristics

In the SIMOCODE pro system, there are internal function blocks e.g. for control stations, control functions and motor protection.Every function block has a name and is equipped with inputs and outputs.

The following table shows the possible inputs/outputs:

Table 1-10: Possible inputs/outputs

Input Symbol Example

Plugs (digital) Function blocks in the basic unit can have digital plugs. These are connected via software to digital sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.

Plugs (analog) Function blocks in the basic unit can have analog plugs. These are connected via software to analog sockets. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.Example: 2-byte word for cyclic signaling data.

Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block “BU - input”. Control devices and auxiliary switches are usually connected there.

Control data from PROFIBUS DP

From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro e.g. function block “cyclic control data”.

Output Symbol Example

Sockets (digital) Function blocks in the basic devices can have digital sockets. These are assigned via software to digital plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.

Sockets (analog) Function blocks in the basic devices can have sok-kets. Sockets are assigned via software to analog plugs. They are relevant for the parameterization e.g. with SIMOCODE ES.

Example: 2-byte word max. current I_max.

Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside e.g. function block “BU - output”. Contactors, for example, are connected there.

Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP

From SIMOCODE pro to the DP master e.g. function block “cyclic signaling data”.

DP

DP


System Description

Schematic of principle structural configuration

The following function block diagram shows the principal configuration of aSIMOCODE pro basic unit:

Figure 1-11: Principal configuration of a SIMOCODE-pro basic unit

Connecting plugs with sockets

Note

The plugs and sockets of the function blocks have not already been connec-ted at the factory with the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit.The internal wiring (connecting the plugs and sockets) is determined by the user according to his respective application. *)

Attention!

If external wiring has already been carried out, but SIMOCODE pro was not yet parameterized:If you now press a button, the contactors will not be activated!

*) If you select an application in SIMOCODE ES, e.g. reversing starter, all links and interlocks for the reversing starter are created in the basic unit.

1

2

3

1

2

Bit 0.0

Bit 0.1

Bit 0.2

Bit 0.0

Bit 0.1

Bit 0.2

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4 4

OUT1

OUT2

OUT3

BU input

Cyclicsignaling data

Cycliccontrol data

BU output

3

DP DP

From the DPMaster

To the DPMaster

PROFIBUS DP

BU

PROFIBUS DP

Function block A

Function block C

Function block B

Inputs(terminals)

Outputs(sockets)

Inputs(plugs)

Outputs(sockets)

4

Outputs(terminals)

Inputs(plugs)

external BU internal

Standard function

Control function

Logic function

Standard function

Function block D

SIMOCODE pro

1-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Short Instructions for Configuring

a Reversing Starter 2In this chapter

In this chapter you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing starter including an example. Most of the parameters are appropriately set as factory defaults for most of the applications. Only a few parameters have to be set.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups: • planners• configurators• mechanics• electricians• commissioners.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge: • basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro (see chapter 1 “System Description”)• basic knowledge of the SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.


Short Instructions for Configuring a Reversing Starter

2.1 Introduction and target of the example

Introduction

The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-step how to work with SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter will be equipped with • a local control station• and then with a second control station with PROFIBUS DP

The SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization. The PC/programming device is connected to the basic unit via PC cable.

Target of the example

This example is intended to 1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation of a reversing

starter with SIMOCODE pro in only a few steps2. Help you modify this example for your respective application 3. Help you easily implement other applications

Important steps

The two important steps with SIMOCODE are always: • implementation of the external wiring (for control and feedback of main cur-

rent switching devices and control and signaling devices)• implementation/activation of internal SIMOCODE functions, with control and

analysis of the SIMOCODE inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE wiring).

Conditions

• Load feeder/motor present• PLC/DCS control with PROFIBUS DP interface is present• The main circuit for the reversing circuit including the current measurement

module is already wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must be led through the push-through system openings of the current measure-ment module.

• PC/programming device is present• The SIMOCODE ES software is installed• The basic unit has the basic factory default settings. In chapter "Configuring

the basic factory default setting" on page 12-10 you will learn how to imple-ment the basic factory default settings.

SIMOCODE pro

2-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


2.2 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control

station

Necessary components

The following table shows the components that are required for this example:

Table 2-1: Components needed for the example

Item Ordering data Order number

1 SIMOCODE pro C basic unit(SIMOCODE pro V also possible)

3UF7000-1AU00-0(3UF7000-1AU00-0)

2 Current measurement module 0.3 A up to 3 A 3UF7000-1AU00-0

3 Connecting cable for connecting the basic unit and the current measurement module, depending on the length

3UF7000-1AU00-0

4 “SIMOCODE ES Smart” or “SIMOCODE ES Professional” software for parame-terization via the system interface(also “SIMOCODE ES Professional” softwarefor parameterization via PROFIBUS and the system interface, including STEP-7 Object Manager possible)

3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0

(3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0)

5 PC cable for connecting the basic device to a PC/ pro-gramming device

3UF7000-1AU00-0

6 PROFIBUS DP cable



Circuitry of the reversing starter with SIMOCODE pro

The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the con-trol circuit:

Figure 2-1: Circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro

Main circuit Control circuit

3/N/PE ~ 50/60 Hz 400/230 VL1L2L3NPE

Q1

- K1

1 3 5

2 4 6

1 3 5

M3~

ϑ

PE WVU

2 4 6


L1/L+

F11

K1N/L–

S0 S1

A1 A2

Motor, motor rated current e.g. 3 A

Basic unit (BU)3 push-throughsystem openings

Systeminterface

Connecting cable Systeminterface

S2

K2

CLASS 10Optional: thermistor

1 3 5

2 4 6- K2

IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V

OUT1 OUT2 1

SIMOCODE pro

2-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter

The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with a local control station for the commands• LEFT• OFF• RIGHT.

Displays, signals, etc. are not taken into account.

Figure 2-2: Circuit diagram of the control circuit of a reversing starter

The necessary interlocks and links are carried out via the software in the basic unit.

Standard reversing starter Reversing starter w. SIMOCODE pro

Necessary interlocksand links

S0: “LEFT” button S1: “OFF” button S2: “RIGHT” button

K1: contactor clockwise rotationK2: contactor counterclockwise rotation

L1/L+

F11

K1N/L–

S0 S1

A1 A2

Basic unit (BU)

K2

S2

L1/L+

N/L–K2

K2

K1

S2

S1

K1

K2

S0

K1

IN1 IN2 IN3 24 V

OUT1 OUT2 1



2.3 Parameterization

The basics of parameterization

After the external connections have been carried out (contactor coils con-nected, current measurement module integrated in the main circuit), the second step is the parameterization of SIMOCODE pro. For this you need to know the following points:

Figure 2-3: Schematic of the different function blocks in SIMOCODE pro

Point Description

1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for control stations and control functions with motor protection.

2 Function blocks have names.

3 Function blocks can have settings, e.g. the control function and the set cur-rent. In the example: control function “reversing starter” and set current 3 A.

4 Function blocks have inputs and outputs. These are clearly designated.

5 You have to do the following in order to achieve the desired functionality:• connect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets

(i.e put the plugs in the sockets)• if required, set the values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current,

type of control function

6 The inputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and labe-led as plugs:

7 The outputs of the function blocks in the basic device are designated and labeled as sockets:

8 Plugs and sockets of the inputs and outputs of the devices are not connected as factory defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors are not activa-ted.

SIMOCODE pro

2-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


General procedure for parameterizing a reversing starter

Parameterization means:1. Setting values2. Linking function blocks

In the example, this means the following: • you must choose the control function “reversing starter” to implement all

interlocks and links in the basic device for the reversing starter. • you have to determine the set current Ie in the function block “Motor Protec-

tion”. In this case, the set current corresponds to the motor rated current, here 3 A.

• the “BU - output” function block must be connected to the sockets of the “control/contactor” function block via the software. This means

– connect BU - output 1 to socket contactor control QE1 (right) – connect BU - output 2 to socket contactor control QE2 (left)

• the plugs of the “control/contactors” function block must be connected to the sockets of the “BU - input” function block via the software. This means

– connect local control station [LC] ON< to socket BU - input 1– connect local control station [LC] OFF to socket BU - input 2– connect local control station [LC] ON> to socket BU - input 3

Figure 2-4: Schematic of parameterization in the example

The assignment of the contactor controls QE* depends on the parameteri-zed control function. See chapter 4 "Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signal of the control functions"

SIMOCODE pro

• Connectrelay outputs

1

2

1

2

3

BU - inputs

Local control station [LC] Contactor controls

• Choose a reversing starter• Determine Ie

• Connect digital inputs

BU - outputs

QE1

QE2ON<

OFF

ON>

Control/contactors

Ie = 3 A

Right

Left



Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Carry out the following steps:

Table 2-2: Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Step Description

1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC/programming device.

2 Choose the control function “reversing starter” as the application. When you select this application, a range of presettings will be automatically carried out that you will have to check later.

3 Under “Device configuration”, select either SIMOCODE pro C orSIMOCODE pro V. Deactivate the operator panel if not present.

4 Open the dialog Device parameters > Motor protection > Overload/ asymmetry/

blocking. Set the set current Ie1 to 3A.

5 Open the dialog Further function blocks > Outputs > Basic device and check the following settings:• contactor control > contactor control QE1.• contactor control > contactor control QE2.

6 Open the dialog Device parameters> Motor control > Control stations and check the following settings:• local control [LC] ON<: BU - input 1

• local control [LC] OFF: BU - input 2

• local control [LC] ON>: BU - input 3

Check if the releases for “ON” and “OFF” for the operating mode “local2” are set.

7 Parameterization is finished. Store the parameter file on your PC/ pro-gramming device using Switchgear > Save.

The relay outputs are connected to the contactor controls. QE1

QE2

1

2

BU - outputControl/contactors

Note:

By choosing a preset application (step 2), other presettings might be made when assigning the BU outputs to the contactor controls.

The control stationis now connected “locally” with the digital inputs.1

2

3

BU - input

ON<

Off

ON>

Control/contactors

SIMOCODE pro

2-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Transferring the parameters to the basic device and commissioning

After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and start up the reversing starter. To do this, execute the following steps:

Table 2-3: Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning

Attention

In this example, switching between “right” and “left” is only possible via “OFF” and after expiration of the preset interlocking time of 5 seconds.

Configuration with local control station is finished

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a functional reversing starter with a local control station. If the wiring and parameterization is correct, the contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are activated when the corresponding but-tons are pushed.

Step Description

1 Switch on the voltage supply of the basic device.

2 Connect the serial interface of the PC/programming device and the system interface of the basic unit with the PC cable.

3 Observe the status LEDs on the basic unit. The “Device” LED must light up green. SIMOCODE pro can be started up.

4 Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu e.g. using

Target system > Load in switchgear. Choose the RS232 interface with which SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC via the PC cable.

5 After having transferred the data to the basic device, you will receive the message “Download to the switchgear finished successfully”.



2.4 Extending the reversing starter with a control station

via PROFIBUS DP

In this section

In this section you will find out how the previously configured example can be extended by one control station via PROFIBUS DP. You have the option of using either the local control stations (local control) or PLC/ DCS (remote control). This enables SIMOCODE pro to be controlled locally via buttons as well as via PLC/ DCS. The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in SIMOCODE pro. For this reason, you only have to set the PROFIBUS DP address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized correctly as a DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP.

Conditions

The following conditions must be fulfilled: • the motor is switched off • the supply voltage for the basic device is switched on. The “Device” LED

must light up green• you connected the basic unit to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP inter-

face is on the front side (9-pole SUB-D socket) • you have integrated SIMOCODE pro in your automatization system.

You will find further information on the integration of DP slaves in the docu-mentation for the automation system.

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

First you have to set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit. The follo-wing option are available:• via the addressing plug• via SIMOCODE ES.

SIMOCODE pro

2-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES


Table 2-4: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug


Table 2-5: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Step Description

1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.

2 Start SIMOCODE ES.

3 Open the menu Switchgear > Open online.

4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.Press OK to confirm.

5 Open the dialog Device parameters> Bus parameters.

6 Select the DP address.

7 Save the data in the basic unit with Target system > Load to switchgear. The address is set. Confirm the change of the address.

Step Description

1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch. The switches are numbered. Example address 21: Put the switches “16”+“4”+“1” in the “ON position”.

2 If necessary, pull the PC cable out of the system interface.

3 Plug the addressing plug in the system interface.The “Device” LED lights up yellow.

4 Briefly press the test/ reset button. The set address is accepted. The “Device” LED blinks yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

5 Pull the addressing plug from the system interface.



Additional internal components of the basic unit

The control local control station [LC] is already wired, the external compon-ents are connected and the required internal connections have been carried out.The following additional internal components that are already connected as factory defaults and do not have to be parameterized are required: • PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands “LEFT”, “OFF”

and “RIGHT”• PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for the switching between the control stations (local)

and the PLC/DCS (remotely)– Bit0.5=0: local control station [LC] active– Bit0.5=0: PLC/ DCS [DP] control station active.

The PLC/DCS [DP] control station and the switch-over (plug) are already con-nected with the bits (sockets) as factory defaults. The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Device parameters > Motor control > Control stations.

Figure 2-5: Schematic of internal components of the basic unit for the example

All pre-assigned cyclic signaling data is not shown. The assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Additional function blocks > Outputs > Cyclic signaling data

Configuration with PLC/ DCS [DP] control station is finished

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now finished. You now have a reversing starter with an additional control station via PROFIBUS DP.The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the corresponding bits.

SIMOCODEpro

1

2

3

1

2

Bit0.1

Bit0.2

PROFIBUS DP

Bit0.5

LEFT

OFF

RIGHT

LEFT

OFF

RIGHT

Status ON<

OFF

ON>

QE1

QE2

Bit0.0

Bit0.1

Bit0.2

BU - input BU - output

Bit0.0

DP

Cyclic control data

DP

Cyclic signaling data

Control stations

Right

Left

S1

SIMOCODE pro

2-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Protection 3In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on motor protection.Motor protection includes• overload protection• asymmetry protection• blocking protection• thermistor protection.

Unlike motor control, motor protection functions “in the background”. All parameters of the motor protection are explained. They can be active or not depending on the chosen control function.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• commissioners.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge: • good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.

Navigation in SIMOCODE ES

You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > Motor protection.


Motor Protection

3.1 Introduction

Description

The motor protection functions “overload protection”, “asymmetry protec-tion”, “blocking protection” and “thermistor protection” are explained in the chapters 3.2 to 3.4.

Schematic diagram

The following schematic diagram shows the function circuit diagram of the motor protection functions “overload protection”, “asymmetry protection” and “blocking protection” with optional parameter settings and signals.

Figure 3-1: Motor protection functions

Overload protection

Set current Ie1

Set current Ie2

Class 5,10, ... 40

Response at pre-warning level

Reset (manual, automatic)

Load type (3-ph., 1-ph.)

Pause time

Cooling down time

Asymmetry protection

Blocking protection

Extended parameters:

Asymmetry protection level

Blocking protection level

Control function/motor protection

Signal:

- Cooling down time active

- Pause time active

- Emergency start active

- Time to switching off (analog)

- Heating up motor model (analog)

- Remaining cooling down time (analog)

- Last tripping current (analog)

- Pre-warning overload

- Overload + phase failure

- Overload

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

Switchingoff

- Asymmetry

- Blocking

Current

Response at trip level

See table 3-1

See table 3-1

See table 3-1

See table 3-1

SIMOCODE pro

3-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Protection

Adjustable responses “Overload protection”, “Asymmetry protection” and “Blocking

protection”

Table 3-1: Adjustable responses “Overload protection”, “Asymmetry protection” and “Blockingprotection”

Response At pre-warning

level

At trip

level

At “asymme-

try”

level

At “blocking

protection”

level

Deactivated X X X X

Signal X X X X

Warn X (d) X X (d) X

Switch off - X (d) X X (d)

Delay 0 ... 25.5 s - 0 ... 25.5 s 0 ... 25.5 s


Motor Protection

3.2 Overload protection

Description

SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase and AC motors in compliance with IEC 60947-4-1. The tripping class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from class 5 to class 40. Therefore, the switch off time can be adjusted very precisely to the start-up time of the motor which allows the motor to be bet-ter used to capacity. The interval up to the overload tripping is also calcula-ted and can be put at the disposal of the control system. After an overload tripping, the remaining cooling down time can be displayed.

Set current Ie1

The motor rated current is usually set with the set current Ie1. This value is listed on the type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the over-load tripping characteristic curve.

Range: depends on the desired current measurement module

Set current Ie2

The current setting Ie2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds in order to also guarantee suitable overload protection for the second speed as well.

Range: depends on the desired current measurement module

Attention

Please make sure that both current settings are in the same range. Other-wise, you should use an additional 3U18 current transformer.

Set current Ie1 0.3 A up to 3 A

2.4 A up to 25 A

10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A

63 A up to 630 A

Set current Ie2: 0.3 A up to 3 A

2.4 A up to 25 A

10 A up to 100 A

20 A up to 200 A

63 A up to 630 A

SIMOCODE pro

3-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Protection

Class

The class (tripping class) indicates the maximum tripping time in whichSIMOCODE must trip cold with the 7.2-fold set current Ie (motor protection according to IEC 60947). Please take into account that with start-ups > “Class 10”, the admissible AC3 current of the contactor must be reduced (derating), which means that a larger contactor must be used.The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35and 40 for a 3-pole symmetric load:

Figure 3-2: Switch-off classes for 3-pole symmetric loads

Range:

Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40

1,15


Motor Protection

The following diagram shows the tripping classes 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35and 40 for a 2-pole load:

Figure 3-3: Switch-off classes for 2-pole load

Range:

Response in case of overload

The response of SIMOCODE pro can be additionally adjusted in case of overload:Further information: see “Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter "Important Notes" and the table “Responses” in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".

Attention

With motors for EEx e applications the response must remain set to “switch off”!

Class: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40

0,85

SIMOCODE pro

3-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Protection

Cooling time

The cooling down time is the specified time after which an overload tripping can be reset. It is usually five minutes.Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE during this time correspondingly extend the specified time.

Range:

Pause time

The pause time is the specified time for the cooling response of the motor when switching off under normal operating conditions (not in the case of overload tripping!). After this interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is deleted and a new cold start is possible. Due to this, fre-quent start-ups within a short period of time are possible.The following schematic shows the cooling off response with and without a pause time:

Figure 3-4: Cooling down response with and without pause time

Attention

The motor and the switchgear must be dimensioned specifically for this load!

Range:

Cooling down time: 60 up to 6553.5 seconds

Pause time: 0 up to 6553.5 seconds

Trip limit

ON

t

t

t

υ

υ

Overload tripping

Without pause time

With pause time

Motor

OFF

No overload tripping

Pause time Thermal memory will be deleted after the pause time

Trip limit


Motor Protection

Load type

You can choose whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or 3-phase load. The internal earth-fault detection must be deactivated. The phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.

Range:

Delay pre-warning

The “delay” parameter is used to determine the interval during which the pre-warning level (1.15 x Ie) must be constantly exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is no reaction. In case of phase failure or asymmetry > 50%, this pre-warning is already issued at approx. 0.85 x Ie.

Reset

If the “reset” parameter is set to “automatic”, the “overload”, “overload + asymmetry” and “thermistor” faults are acknowledged automatically• if the cooling down time has expired• if the thermistor value has decreased to the resetting value according to spe-

cification

If the “reset” parameter is set to “automatic”, the errors must be acknow-ledged by a reset signal:• “reset” button on the basic unit• “reset” button on the operator panel• “reset” standard function modules.

For this reason, the “reset - input” inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g. using reset via the bus.

Range:

Load type: 1-phase, 3-phase

Reset: Manual, automatic

SIMOCODE pro

3-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Protection

3.3 Asymmetry monitoring

Description

The extent of the phase asymmetry can be monitored and transmitted to the control system. A definable and delayable response can be tripped when an adjustable limit is exceeded. If the phase asymmetry is greater than 50%, a reduction of the tripping time according to the overload charac-teristic curve takes place automatically since the heat development in motors increases with asymmetric conditions.

Limit

The limit of the asymmetry to which SIMOCODE pro is to react when overs-hot is set here. Range:

Response

Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase asymmetry:See “Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter "Important Notes" and the table “Responses” in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".

Asymmetry protection - delay

The asymmetry limit must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise, there is no reaction.

Limit: 0 to 100%


Motor Protection

3.4 Blocking protection

Description

After the motor current exceeds an adjustable blocking limit (current limit), a definable and delayable response can be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro. For example, the motor can be set to switch off quickly independently of the overload protection. The blocking protection is only active after the parame-terized class interval has elapsed, e.g. for class 10 after 10 seconds. The blocking protection prevents the motor from unnecessary high thermal and mechanical load as well as premature deterioration.

Limit

After exceeding the blocking limit, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the specified response. Range:

Response

Here you can determine the response to be executed when the blocking limit is exceeded:See “Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter "Important Notes" and the table “Responses” in chapter 3.1 "Introduction".

Delay

The “delay” parameter is used to specify the time interval. The blocking level must constantly be exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. Otherwise there is no reaction.

Limit: 0 up to 1020% of Ie

SIMOCODE pro

3-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Protection

3.5 Temperature monitoring

Description

Temperature monitoring is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor. Temperature monitoring is used for:• motors with high switching frequencies• converter operation• intermittent operation and/or during braking• a restricted air supply• speeds that are lower than the rated speed

In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or in the bearings of the motor.

Characteristic curves

SIMOCODE pro provides the option of connecting two completely different types of sensors:

Figure 3-5: Characteristic curves of temperature sensors

υ

R

υ

R

1 2 υ

R

1 2

Temperature monitoring via binary PTC thermi-stors that can be connected to basic unit 1 or basic unit 2. The resistance of the thermistors increases rapidly when the limit temperature is reached.

PTC

Temperature monitoring via analog temperature sensors like NTC, KTY83/84, PT100, PT1000 that are connected to the optional temperature module (T module). They have a characteristic curve that changes almost linearly when the tem-perature rises. For this reason, separate limits can be set for the warning temperature and the switch off temperature.

NTCPT / KTY

Sensor Type:

Binary

Analog


Motor Protection

Schematic

The following schematic shows the function circuit diagram of temperature monitoring:

Figure 3-6: Temperature monitoring

“Thermistor protection, binary” response

• Overtemperature:Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if the tem-perature exceeds the trip limit.

Attention

With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to “switch off”!

• Sensor error (sensor circuit error):Here you can choose the SIMOCODE pro response to be executed if there is a short circuit or a wire break in the thermistor sensor cable.

See also “Tables of Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter "Important Notes".

Table 3-2: “Thermistor protection, binary” response

Response Trip limit T> Sensor fault

Deactivated - X

Signal X X

Warn X X

Switch off X X

Thermistor protection (binary)

Response at trip limit

Response to sensor fault

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

Activation (in device configuration)

Signal:

- Thermistor short circuit

ThermistorinputBU

Switchingoff

u

R

seetable 3-2

seetable 3-2

- Thermistor trip limit

- Thermistor wire break

SIMOCODE pro

3-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control 4In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on• control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The follo-

wing related topics are explained:– how control stations, modes of operation and enables work together– how control commands e.g. “ON”, “OFF” are switched through to the

control function• control functions you can select according to need. The following related

topics are explained:– how control commands e.g. “ON”, “OFF” are switched through from the

control stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs– which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• PLC programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You need knowledge about:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• electrical drive engineering• motor protection.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameter > Motor control.


Motor Control

4.1 Control stations

4.1.1 Description

Control stations are places from which control commands are given to the motor. SIMOCODE pro supports four different control stations: • Local, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands are issued via

pushbutton.• PLC/DCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system

(remote).• PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via

PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.• Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator

panel in the switchgear cabinet door.

Control commands can be e.g: – motor on (ON<), motor off (OFF) for a direct starter– motor left (ON<), motor off (OFF), motor right (ON>) for a reversing starter– motor slow (ON<), motor fast (ON<<) , motor off (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit

The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control commands to take effect.

Control stations contain:• 5 inputs (plugs ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>). The number of active

inputs depends on the control function chosen. A direct starter, for example, has only the inputs “ON>” and “OFF” active.

SIMOCODE pro

4-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Control stations

• Control station - local controlIn this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor and are wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally device inputs) for the control com-mands to take effect.

• Control station - PLC/DCSThis control station is primarily intended for control commands from the auto-mation system (PLC/DCS) via the cyclic control telegram of PROFIBUS DP. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (normally PROFIBUS DP bits) for the control commands to take effect.

Attention

The OFF command “LC OFF” is 0-active. Therefore, it is guaranteed that SIMOCODE pro switches off the motor safely e.g. in case of a wire break in the supply cable. The precondition is that the control station is active.

Pushbutton BU input Local [LC]ON<<

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

1

2

3

4

Toenable

PLC

Cycl. cont. data

DP

PLC/DCS [DPV1]ON<<

OFF

ON>>

ON<

ON>

Bit 0.0

Bit 1.7

Number: 16

To enable


Motor Control

• Control station - PCThis control station is primarily intended for switching commands on an arbi-trary PC which, along with the automation system, is used as a second master on the PROFIBUS DP. The control commands are sent via the acyclic control telegram from PROFIBUS DPV1.

• Control station - operator panelThis control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the buttons of the 3UF72 operator panel which is e.g. mounted in a switchgear cabinet door. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (nor-mally buttons of the operator panel) for the control commands to take effect.

Attention

If the SIMOCODE ES Professional/SIMATIC PDM PC software is connec-ted to SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automati-cally take effect via the PC[DPV1] control station. No additional paramete-rization is necessary.

PC

Acycl. cont. data

DP

PC [DPV1]ON<<

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

Bit 0.0

Bit 1.7

Number: 16

To enable

Attention

Since the operator panel only has 4 buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button must be used as a speed switch button for control functions with 2 rotational speeds and 2 directions of rotation. For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control com-mand “[OP]<>/ <<>>”.

Attention

If the SIMOCODE ES PC-Software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, the control commands automatically take effect via the control station operator panel (OP). No additional parameterization is necessary.

Op. panel [OP]

Operatorpanel

OP buttons <>/<<>>

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

Toenable

SIMOCODE pro

4-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.1.2 Modes of operation and mode selectors

Modes of operation

You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There are four different modes of operation you can switch between: • local 1• local 2• local 3• remote/automatic

In this mode of operation, the communication must be carried out via PLC.

Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control sta-tion (e.g local and PLC/DCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also man-datory to operate the control stations selectively. Four modes of operation are provided for this purpose which can be selected via two control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every mode of opera-tion, it can be stipulated if “ON commands” and/or “OFF commands” are to be used. The modes of operation are controlled in multiplex operation, i.e. only one mode of operation is active at any one time.Example:There are three modes of operation in a system:

Table 4-1: Modes of operation

The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these modes of operation. The remote switching operation should be controlled via the bus. The key-operated switch operation has priority over all other modes of operation.

Mode of operation Description

Key-operated switch ope-ration,e.g. local 1

Only local control entries are admissible!All other control stations are locked.

Manual operation,e.g. local 3

Only operator panel control commands and local control commands can be issued.

Remote operation,e.g. remote/automatic

Only PLC/DCS control commands are permitted; locally, only OFF commands are permitted.


Motor Control

Mode selectors

The S1/S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the “local1”, “local2”, “local3” and “remote/automatic” modes of operation. The inputs (S1 and S2 plugs) must be connected to arbitrary sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this. The following table shows the modes of operation, depending on the signal status of the S1 and S2 mode selectors:

Table 4-2: Modes of operation depending on S1 and S2

Switch authorizations for the individual control stations (local control [LC], PLC/DCS [DP], PC [DPV1], operator panel (OP)) can be set with the different modes of operation for enabling the control stations. The modes of opera-tion are operated via the mode selector in the multiplex. This means that only one mode of operation is always valid, controlled via the signals S1 and S2 (column). Example for a dynamic mode of operation in relationship to time:

Figure 4-1: Example - modes of operation

Input

Mode of operation

Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote/

automatic

S1 0 0 1 1

S2 0 1 0 1

0

0

Local 1 Remote Local 3 Remote Local 1

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

Key-

Time t

Remote operation Manual operation Remote operation Key-

S1

S2

0

operated switch operated switch

SIMOCODE pro

4-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Operator enable of the individual control stations

The following diagram shows the operator enable of an individual control station:

Figure 4-2: Operator enable of a single control station

The following is enabled:

: all ON commands

: OFF command

I O

ON<<

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

OFF

I

O

Inputs

Single control station

Simplified diagramof the single control station

ON

ON: ON>>, ON>,

4 4

E1...4I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

E1...4

E1...4

E1...4

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

Local control [LC]

PLC/DCS [DP]

PC [DPV1]

Operator panel (OP)

ON<, ON<<,

E

A


Motor Control

4.1.3 Enables and enabled control command

Enables

Enables for the control commands “ON” and “OFF”, which must be activa-ted, are assigned to each single control station for every mode of operation. The corresponding checkbox is activated in the dialog “Control stations” in SIMOCODE ES.

Enabled control command

The control commands are switched through to the function block “Enabled control command”. The control function, e.g. reversing starter, is usually controlled with this function block’s sockets.

Enables and enabled control command schematic

The following diagram shows the control stations and modes of operation:

Figure 4-3: Enables and enabled control command

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON>

Local

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Operator

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PLC/DCS [DP]

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

PC [DPV1]

Local1 Local2 Local3 Remote

S1

S2

Mode selector

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

En-

Enables

ON

OFF

abledcontrolcommand

ON <<

OFF

ON >>

ON <

ON >

Enables

Enables

ON

OFF

Activation of enables for control commands “ON” and “OFF” in SIMOCODE ES

To the control function

Enables

ON

OFF

Enables

ON

OFF

Enables

ON

OFF

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

I

O

control [LC]

panel (OP)

SIMOCODE pro

4-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.1.4 Settings

Control stations Description

LC Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbi-trary sockets ,but usually device inputs).The “OFF” plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].

ON<<

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

PLC/DCS [DP] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbi-trary sockets ,but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DP)

ON<<

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

PC [DPV1] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbi-trary sockets ,but usually control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)

ON<<

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

Operator panel [OP] Activates the control station via an arbitrary signal (arbi-trary sockets ,but usually operator panel pushbuttons)

<>/<<>>

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

Mode selector For switching between the 4 modes of operation local 1, local 2, local 3, remote with arbitrary signals(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

S1

S1

Table 4-3: Control station settings


Motor Control

4.2 Control functions

4.2.1 Description

Control functions (e.g. direct starters, reversing starters) are used for con-trolling load feeders.They have the following important features:• enabling/evaluation of control stations• monitoring switching on/switching off (no current flows without the ON com-

mand)• monitoring the OFF state (no current flows without the ON command)• monitoring the ON status• switching off in case of a fault.

For monitoring these statuses, SIMOCODE uses F (feedback) ON, which is usually derived directly from the current flow information. All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications are already implemented in the control functions.Control functions contain:• inputs (plug ) for

– control commands (ON <<,ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually connected with the sockets “Enabled control command”. From there, control commands come from the different control stations. The num-ber of active inputs depends on the control function chosen. For example, with a direct starter, only the inputs “ON>” and “OFF” are active.

• auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON• outputs (sockets ) for

– contactor controls QE1 to QE5. The number of contactor controls depends on the control function chosen. The contactor controls are usually connected to the relay outputs that are intended for controlling the contactor coils

– displays (lamp controls) QL*, QLS. The number of displays depends on the control function chosen.

– statuses, e.g. “Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>”. The number of statu-ses depends on the control function chosen.

– faults, e.g. “Fault - feedback (F) ON”, “Fault - antivalence”• settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON/OFF, etc. • motor protection with the parameters e.g. “Overload protection - set current

Ie1”, overload protection - class”, etc. These parameters are described in chapter3 "Motor Protection".Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is active “in the background”. Motor protection and thermistor motor protection are independent functions that switch off the motor when activated via the control functions.

• Standard function blocks that can be activated as required • A logic component with all necessary interlockings and connections for the

control function

SIMOCODE pro

4-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Control function schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of a control function:

Figure 4-4: General representation of the control function

1) Status signals:

The feeder status feedback is reported via the status signals or the QL signals. The feedback information (“ON” or “OFF”) is linked to the signal “Feedback ON” (e.g. current). Feeder status feedback: • status signals, e.g. “Status ON”<”, that can be analyzed e.g. via

PROFIBUS DP• display, (lamp control) “Display - QLE<”, that can activate e.g. a signal lamp

ON<<

En-abledcontrolcommand

ON<<

OFF

ON>>

ON<

ON>

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON>>

QE1

QE3

QE5

QE2

QE4

Control commands Contactor controls

Displays (lamp

QLE <<

QLA

QLE >>

QLE <

QLE >

QLS

(ON<<)

(ON<)

(OFF)

(ON>)

(ON>>)

(Fault)

Aux. control inputs *

Plugs of the control commands are usually connected with the “Enabled control com-mand” sockets

* Abbreviations

Feed-back ON

Feedback ON

FC Feedback CLOSE

FO Feedback OPEN

TC Torque CLOSE

TO Torque OPEN

F ON

FC

FO

TC

TO

Status signals 1),

ON<<

OFF

ON>>

ON<

ON>

Contactors/control

Setting

Control function

Motor protection

e.g. for PROFIBUS DP

control)


Motor Control

Extent and application

Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control functions:

SIMOCODE

Control function pro C

(BU1)

pro V

(BU2)

Overload relay ✓ ✓

Direct starter ✓ ✓

Reversing starter ✓ ✓

Circuit breaker ✓ ✓

Star-delta starter — ✓

Star-delta starter, with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

Dahlander — ✓

Dahlander,with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

Pole-changing switch — ✓

Pole-changing switch,with reversal of the direction of rotation

— ✓

Valve — ✓

Slider 1 to slider 5 — ✓

Soft starter — ✓

Soft reversing starter — ✓

Table 4-4: Control functions

SIMOCODE pro

4-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.2.2 General settings and definitions

Parameters

Parameter Description

F ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with “Status - current flowing” socket) as fac-tory default. An auxiliary contact from the contactor to the signal is not necessary. Depending on the control function chosen, this state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the “status - ON <<, - ON <, - ON >, - ON >>” signals. “No current flowing” means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact from the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is signaled by the QLA display and the “Status - OFF” signal

Non-maintained command mode

• Deactivated:the control command on the corresponding input of the control stations “ON <, ON <<, ON >,ON >>” is saved. It can only be revoked by an “OFF” control command from the corresponding control station. The auxiliary contact for locking the contactor is no longer necessary. Motor feeders are usually operated in lok-king mode. Locking is preset.

• Activated:non-maintained command mode affects the inputs of all control stations “ON<, ON <<, ON >, ON >>”, depending on the control function chosen. A control command is only effective as long as there is a “high signal”.

Save switching command

• Deactivated:commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to the other are only implemented after a previous “OFF” and after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed. This setting is usually used and is preset.

• Activated:commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational speed to the other are implemented without a previous “OFF” and after the interlocking time/switching interval has elapsed.If the selected direction/speed cannot be executed immediately due to a parameterized interlocking time/switching interval, the selection is signalized by flickering QLE displays. Your selection can be canceled at any time with OFF.

Load type You can choose between• motor• resistive load

Table 4-5: General settings and definitions


Motor Control

Feedback time SIMOCODE monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via F ON (Feedback ON). If the status of F ON changes - without a corresponding switching command - the fault feedback (F) switches off the feeder. The default value is 0.5 s.The feedback time can be used to suppress such “feedback faults” for a defined period of time, e.g. in case of network switches. When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE continuously controls if F ON = 0. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the “ON” control command being issued, a fault message “fault - feedback (F) ON” is issued. The contactor controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified. When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously con-trols if F ON = 1. If the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the “OFF command” being issued, a fault message “fault - feedback (F) OFF” is issued. The contactor controls are deactivated.

Execution time SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off. Switching on/switching off must be completed within this time period. The default value is 1.0 s. After an “ON” control command has been issued, SIMOCODE pro must measure the current in the main cir-cuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message “Fault - execution ON command” will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deacti-vates the contactor controls.After the “OFF” control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must not be able to detect any current in the main circuit after the execu-tion time. Otherwise, the fault message “Fault - execution OFF command” will be issued. The contactor controls can only be con-nected after the fault has been rectified.

Switching interval For the "Dahlander" and "pole-changing switch" control functions, switching from the fast speed to the slow one can be delayed with the time configured.For the "Star/Delta" control function, the switching interval extends the switching interval between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by the time configured.

Interlocking time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters, both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

Parameter Description

Table 4-5: General settings and definitions

SIMOCODE pro

4-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Figure 4-5: Execution time (Az) and feedback time (Rz) depending on F ON

Faults

The contactor controls are deactivated. There is also: • a flashing signal on the QLS lamp control • a flashing signal on the “GEN. FAULT” LED • the “Status - general fault” signal • the corresponding signaling bit of the fault

1

0OFF

Switch ON ON

OFF

1

0OFF

Switch OFF

QE

F ON

Az Rz Az Rz

Voltage failure,e.g. pulsating current conditions

Az: Execution timeRz: Feedback time


Motor Control

4.2.3 Overload relay

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like an electronic over-load relay. Control commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the load. The control stations, as well as the inputs of the control function (e.g. ON>, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays.When applying the control voltage, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes the QE3 contactor control; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault signal of a protection or monitoring system. The QE3 contactor control must be connected to an arbitrary relay output that switches off the contactor coil of the motor contactor in case of over-load.

Overload relay schematic

Figure 4-6: Overload relay schematic

Settings

You will find detailed information about the settings in chapter "General set-tings and definitions" on page 4-13.

Note:

In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset when the overload is tripped (=0). This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.

Overload relay Description

F ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket).

Load type You can select between• motor• resistive load.

Table 4-6: Overload relay settings

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

QE3

F ON* QLS (Fault)

*Feedback ON

Contactors/controlling

Load type

Overload relays

Motor protection

SIMOCODE pro

4-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.2.4 Direct starters

Description

SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.

Control commands

• Start with “ON >” activates the QE1 internal contactor control• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” sockets.

Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.

Direct starter schematic

Figure 4-7: Direct starter schematic

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays (lamps)

Status

QE1

F ON*

QLA

QLE >

QLS

OFF

ON>

(ON)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

OFF

ON>


Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Direct starters

Motor protection

ON

command mode


Motor Control

Settings


Direct starter Description

OFF OFF control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,preferably with the “Enabled control command - OFF” socket)

ON> ON control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,preferably with the “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

F ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket).


• Deactivated (presetting)• Activated

Load type You can select between• motor• resistive load

Feedback time Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds

Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-7: Direct starter settings

SIMOCODE pro

4-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.2.5 Reversing starters

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of rota-tion of the motor (forwards and backwards).

Control commands

• Start with “ON >” activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise i.e. for-wards)

• Start with “ON <” activates the QE2 contactor control (counter-clockwise i.e. backwards)

• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1 and QE2 internal contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the “enabled control command” sockets.

Every fault signal causes the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to be deacti-vated.

Switching the direction of rotation

Switching the direction of rotation is possible• via the OFF control command• directly, when the “Save switching command” is activated• if the signal “Status - ON >” or “Status - ON <” is no longer issued (motor is

switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired.

SIMOCODE pro prevents both the contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.


Motor Control

Reversing starter schematic

Figure 4-8: Reversing starter schematic

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor activations

Displays

Status -

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLE <

QLA

QLE >

QLS

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON<

OFF

ON>


Feedback time

Execution time

Interlocking time

Non-maintained

Save switching

Load type

(ON>)

(OFF)

(Fault)

(ON<)

*Feedback ON

Reversing starter

Motor protection

Right

Left

Interlocking time

active

command mode

command

SIMOCODE pro

4-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Settings


Reversing starter Description

ON< ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON<” socket)

OFF OFF control command (connection with optional socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - OFF” socket)

ON> ON> control command, clockwise rotation(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

F ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket)





Load type You can select between• motor• resistive load



Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 seconds

Table 4-8: Reversing starter settings


Motor Control

4.2.6 Circuit breaker

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can ideally switch a circuit brea-ker (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and OFF. Thus, the circuit breakers are connected to PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.

Control commands

• Start with “ON>” activates the QE1 contactor control for an impulse of400 ms.

• Stop with “OFF” activates the QE2 contactor control for an impulse of400 ms.

• With “reset”, the QE2 contactor control is activated for an impulse of 400 ms when the circuit breaker is released (alarm switch = ON).

The impulse of a control command is always fully executed before the “counter impulse” is set.


Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the

“ON connection” of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.

2. Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the “OFF connection” of the motor drive of the circuit breaker.

3. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the auxiliary switch (HS) of the circuit breaker, to the auxiliary control input “Feedback ON”.

4. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input, which is connected to the alarm switch of the circuit breaker, to the input of the “External fault 1” standard function block.

SIMOCODE pro

4-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Circuit breaker schematic

Figure 4-9: Circuit breaker schematic

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE >

QLS

OFF

ON>

400 ms.

400 ms.

OFF

ON>


Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

(ON)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

Circuit breaker

Motor protection

ON

OFF

Auxiliary switch

command mode


Motor Control

Settings


Circuit breaker Description

OFF OFF control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - OFF” socket)

ON> ON control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

F ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection always with sok-ket , (input), which the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker is connected to.)




Feedback time Higher than the motor running time of the motor drive of the circuit breaker. Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds


Table 4-9: Circuit breaker settings

SIMOCODE pro

4-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.2.7 Star-delta starters

Description

Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid overloa-ding the network. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro starts the motor first with a star-switched stator winding and then switches it to delta.

Control commands

• Start with “ON” first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor)

• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” sockets

Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor) is connected. SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta: • current-dependent with decreasing current below the level (I < 90% Ie). • time-dependent according to the set time parameter “Maximum time for star

operation” when the current in the star operation does not sink below this level.

Notes

It is recommended wiring the QE* contactor controls to the relay outputs of the basic unit.

Attention

If you use the internal earth-fault detection with a star-delta connection,false trippings might occur. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Attention

If the current measurement module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function.Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/√3

Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A


Motor Control

Switching interval

The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching interval.Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated cur-rent, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta star-ting current if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the interval is longer.

Star-delta starter schematic

Figure 4-10: Star-delta starter schematic

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status -

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE >

QLS

OFF

ON>

OFF

ON>


Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

(ON)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

Switching interval

Maximum time forstar operation

Transformermounted

*Feedback ON

Star-delta starter

Motor protection

Switching time

active

Star contactor

Delta contactor

Network contactorcommand mode

SIMOCODE pro

4-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Settings


Star-delta starter Description



F ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary socket, usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket)






Switching interval Range 0 to 655.3 seconds(10 ms steps)


Time-dependent switching from star to deltarange 0 to 255 seconds

Transformer moun-ted

The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching depend on the mounting place of the current measurement module. • Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)

Table 4-10: Star-delta starter settings


Motor Control

4.2.8 Star-delta starters with reversal of the direction of rotation

Description

With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of rota-tion in star-delta operation.

Control commands

• Clockwise rotation: start with “ON>” first activates the QE1 (star contactor) contactor control and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (network contactor, clockwise rotation)

• Counter-clockwise rotation: start with “ON<” first activates the QE1 (star con-tactor) contactor activation and then immediately activates the QE4 contactor control QE4 (network contactor, counter-clockwise rotation)

• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor con-trols.


Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching from star to delta

For this, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates the QE1 contactor control before connecting the QE2 contactor control (delta contactor). SIMOCODE pro switches from star to delta: • current-dependent, for decreasing current below the level (I < 90% Ie). • time-dependent to the set time parameter “Maximum time for star opera-

tion” when the current in the star operation does not sink below this level.


It is possible to change the direction of rotation• via the OFF control command

• directly, when the “Save switching command” is activated• if the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor is switched off) AND

after the interlocking time has expired.

SIMOCODE pro prevents both the contactors from switching on at the same time.Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the “interlocking time“.

Start-up is always in star mode.

SIMOCODE pro

4-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Notes

It is recommended to wire the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls to the relay outputs of the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control function.

Attention

If you use the internal earth-fault detection for a star-delta connection,false trippings might occur. For delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.

Attention

If the current measurement module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√3 times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function.Example: In = 100 A Ie = In x 1/√3

Ie = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A Current to be set Ie = 57.7 A

Switching interval

The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the switching interval.Reason: for motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated cur-rent, the mains voltage plus motor EMF might lead to a very high delta star-ting current, if the switching interval is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the interval is longer.


Motor Control

Star-delta starter with reversal of the direction of rotation

Figure 4-11: Star-delta starter schematic, with reversal of the direction of rotation

Displays

QLA

QLE> (ON>)

(OFF)

QLE< (ON<)

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Status -

QE1

QE2

F ON*QLS

OFF

ON>

OFF

ON>

(Fault)

QE3

ON<


Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Switching interval


Transformermounted


Interlocking time

*Feedback ON

QE4

ON<

Star-delta starter withreversal of the

Motor protection

Star contactor

Delta contactor

Right - network contactor

Left - network contactor

Switching interval

active

Interlocking time

active

command mode

direction of rotation

SIMOCODE pro

4-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Settings


Star-delta starter Description


ON> ON> control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

ON< ON< control command(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON<” socket)









Switching interval Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds



Time-dependent switching from star to delta.Range 0 to 255 seconds

Transformer moun-ted

The set current and the switching levels for the star-delta switching depend on the mounting position of the current transformer/ cur-rent measurement module. • Delta: set current reduced to In x 1/√3• In supply cable: set current Ie = In (rated current of the motor)

Table 4-11: Star-delta starter settings, with reversal of the direction of rotation


Motor Control

4.2.9 Dahlander

Description

With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator winding at two speeds (fast and slow). SIMOCODE pro wires the stator winding via the contactors so that there is a high pole number at low speed and a low pole number at high speed.

Control commands

• Slow: start with “ON>” first activates the QE2 contactor control (slow)• Fast: start with “ON>>” first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contac-

tor, fast) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (network contactor, fast)

• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls.


Every fault signal causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the speed

It is possible to switch the speed• via the OFF control command• directly, when the “Save switching command” is activated• when the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched off)

AND when changing from “fast” = > “slow” after the switching interval has expired.

SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the “fast” speed from being switched on at the same time as the contactor for the “slow” speed.

Switching interval

The “switching interval” parameter can be used to delay switching from “fast” to “slow” to give the motor enough time to run down.

SIMOCODE pro

4-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Note

Attention

Two set currents must be set for the Dahlander circuit:• Ie1 for the slower speed• Ie1 for the faster speedDepending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise, you will need - according to the corresponding speed - two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measurement module with the range 0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secon-dary currents of the external transformers.

Dahlander schematic

Figure 4-12: Dahlander control function schematic

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status -

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON>

OFF

ON>

(ON>)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

*Feedback ON

ON>>

ON>>

QLE> (ON>>)


Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Switching interval


Dahlander

Motor protection

Switching interval

active

Fast

Slow

Fast - star contactorcommand mode


Motor Control

Settings


Dahlander Description


ON> ON> control command (slow)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

ON>> ON>> control command (fast)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>>” socket)








Execution time Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Switching interval Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-12: Dahlander settings

SIMOCODE pro

4-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.2.10 Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation

Description

This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds.

Control commands

• Right - slow: start with “ON>” first activates QE2 the contactor control (right-slow).

• Right - fast: start with “ON>>” first activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (right-fast)

• Left - slow: start with “ON<” activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)• Left - fast: start with “ON<<” activates the QE3 contactor control (fast-star

contactor) and then immediately activates the QE5 contactor control (left-fast)

• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” socketsIt does not matter in what order the control commands are given.Every fault signal causes the contactor controls to be deactivated.


It is possible to switch the direction of rotation• via the OFF control command• directly, when the parameter “Save switching command” is activated• if the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched off)

AND after the interlocking time has expired.

SIMOCODE prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the “interlocking time“.

Switching the speed

It is possible to switch the speed• via the OFF control command • directly when the “Save switching command” is activated• when the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched off)

AND when changing from “fast” = > “slow” after the switching interval has expired.


Motor Control

Switching interval

The “switching interval” parameter is used to delay switching from “fast” to “slow” to give the motor enough time to run down.

Notes

You need at least 1 digital module for this control function. This control function cannot be implemented with bistable relay outputs.

Schematic Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation

Figure 4-13: Dahlander with reversal of the direction of rotation

Control commands

Displays

Status -

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON>

(ON>)

(OFF)

(Fault)

QE3

ON<

*Feedback ON

QLE< (ON<)

QE4

Contactor controls

QE5

QLE<< (ON<<)

QLE> (ON>>)

OFF

ON>

ON<

ON<<

ON>>

ON>>

ON<<Contactors/controlling

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Switching interval

Save switchingcommand

Interlocking time

Aux. control inputs

Dahlander withreversal of the

Motor protection

Right - fast

Right - slow

Fast - star contactor

Left - slow

Left - fast

Switching interval

active

Interlocking time

active

command mode


SIMOCODE pro

4-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Settings


Dahlander with

reversal of the

direction of

rotation

Description

ON<< ON<< control command (left, fast)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON<<” socket)

ON< ON< control command (left, slow)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON<” socket)

OFF OFF control command(connection with optional socket ,optionally with socket “Enabled control command - OFF”)

ON> ON> control command (left, slow)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

ON>> ON>> control command (right, fast)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>>” socket)








Execution time Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Interlocking time Range: 0 to 255 seconds

Switching interval Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-13: Dahlander control function settings with reversal of the direction of rotation


Motor Control

4.2.11 Pole-changing switches

Description

With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator win-dings in two speed levels (fast and slow).

Control commands

• Slow: start with “ON>” activates the QE2 contactor control (slow).• Fast: start with “ON>>” activates the QE1 contactor control (fast).• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the contactor controls.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stations to SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” sockets

It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.

Every fault signal causes the contactor controls to be deactivated.

Switching the speed

It is possible to switch the speed when the "Feedback ON" signal is no lon-ger issued (motor is switched off) AND when changing from "fast" -> "slow" after the switching interval has expired:• via the OFF control command• directly, when the “Save switching command” is activated.

Switching interval

The “switching interval” parameter can be used to delay switching from “fast” to “slow” to give the motor enough time to run down.

SIMOCODE pro

4-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Note

Attention

Two set currents have to be set for the pole-changing switch:• Ie1 for the slower speed• Ie1 for the faster speedDepending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise, you will need - according to the corresponding speed - two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measurement module with the range 0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secon-dary currents of the external transformers.

Pole-changing switches schematic

Figure 4-14: Pole-changing switch control function

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON>

OFF

ON>

(ON>)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

ON>>

ON>>

QLE>> (ON>>)


Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Switching interval

Save switchingcommand

Pole-changing switches

Motor protection

Switching interval

active

Fast

Slow

command code


Motor Control

Settings


Pole-changing

switches

Description


ON> ON> control command (slow)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

ON>> ON>> control command (fast)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>>” socket)







Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 seconds



Table 4-14: Pole-changing switch settings

SIMOCODE pro

4-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.2.12 Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation

Description

This control function is used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both speeds.

Control commands

• Right - slow: start with “ON>” activates the QE2 contactor control (right-slow)• Right - fast: start with “ON>>” activates the QE1 contactor activation (right-

fast)• Left - slow: start with “ON<” activates the QE4 contactor control (left-slow)• Left - fast: start with “ON<<” activates the QE5 contactor control (left-fast)• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the contactor controls

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stationsto SIMOCODE pro. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the correspon-ding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” sockets.

It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.Every fault signal causes the contactor controls to be deactivated.


It is possible to switch the direction of rotation• via the OFF control command• directly, when the parameter “Save switching command” is activated• if the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched OFF)


SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time.Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the “interlocking time“.

Switching the speed

It is possible to switch• via the OFF control command • directly when the “Save switching command” is activated• when the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched off)

AND when changing from “fast” to “slow” after the switching interval has expired.

Switching interval

SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the speeds “fast” and “slow” from switching on at the same time. The “switching interval” parameter is used to delay switching from “fast” to “slow” to give the motor enough time to run down.


Motor Control

Notes

At least one additional digital module is necessary for this control function.

Attention

Two set currents are to be set with the pole-changing switch:• Ie1 for the slower speed• Ie1 for the faster speedDepending on the current range, the current can be directly measured at both speeds with a single current converter. Otherwise you will need - according to the corresponding speed - two external current converters (e.g. 3UF18 with 1A secondary transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current measurement module with the range 0.3 - 3A. The Ie1/ Ie2 set currents must be converted according to the secondary currents of the external transformers

Schamatic: Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation

Figure 4-15: Pole-changing switch with reversal of the direction of rotation

Control commands

Displays

Status

QE1

QE2

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON>

(ON>)

(OFF)

(Fault)

ON<

*Feedback ON

QLE< (ON<)

QE4

Contactor controls

QE5

QLE<< (ON<<)

QLE>> (ON>>)

OFF

ON>

ON<

ON<<

ON>>

ON>>

ON<<Contactors/controlling

Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

Switching interval


Interlocking time

Pole-changing switch withreversal of the

Motor protection

Right - fast

Right - slow

Left - slow

Left - fast

Switching interval

active

Interlocking time

active


command mode

SIMOCODE pro

4-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Settings


Dahlander with

reversal of the

direction of

rotation

Description

ON<< ON<< control command (left, fast)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON<<” socket)

ON< ON< control command (left, slow)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON<” socket)

OFF OFF control command (connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - OFF” socket)

ON> ON> control command (right, slow)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

ON>> ON>> control command (right, fast)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>>” socket)

Feedback ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket)










Table 4-15: Settings for pole-changing switches with reversal of the direction of rotation


Motor Control

4.2.13 Valve

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate a solenoid valve.With the control commands “OPEN” and “CLOSE”, the valve is brought into the corresponding end position. SIMOCODE must be informed via corre-sponding limit switches (OPEN, CLOSE) when the end position has been reached.

Control commands

• Open: start with “ON>” activates the QE1 internal contactor control.• Close: stop with “OFF” deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stationsto SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” sockets.

Every fault signal causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and puts the valve into the “close” position.

Notes

Attention

The motor protection functions are not active. A current measurement module is not necessary.

Attention

If both end position switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the valve is immediately switched OFF via the fault message “Fault - double 1” (=“close”)If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the valve is switched off with the fault message “Fault - end position fault” (=“close”)

SIMOCODE pro

4-44 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Valve schematic

Figure 4-16: Control function valve schematic

Settings


Direct starters Description

OFF OFF control command (close)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - OFF” socket)

ON> ON control command (open)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)



Execution time Time until the end position is reached. Range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-16: Valve control function settings

Control commands


Contactor controls

Displays

Status

QE1

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON>

(OPEN)

(CLOSE)

(Fault)

OFF

ON>

FC

FO


Execution time

* Abbreviations

FC Feedback CLOSE

FO Feedback OPEN

Non-maintained

ValveOPEN

FC

FO

command mode


Motor Control

4.2.14 Slider

Description

SIMOCODE can control sliders/actuators with this control function. The slider is moved into the corresponding end position with the “OPEN” and “CLOSE” control commands and is deactivated via its end position switches (1-active) or torque switch (0-active). SIMOCODE pro must be informed about the response of the end position switches/ torque switches via its inputs.

Control commands

• Open: start with “ON >” activates the QE1 contactor control until “End posi-tion OPEN” (feedback open) is reached.

• Close: start with “ON <” activates the QE2 contactor control until “End posi-tion CLOSE” (feedback close) is reached.

• Stop with “OFF” deactivates the contactor controls.The drive remains stopped in that position.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stationsto SIMOCODE (see also the description of “control stations”). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” sockets.

Function schematic

Figure 4-17: Function schematic of the torque switch and the end position switch when controlling sliders

Torque switch OPEN Torque switch TC

Motor shaft with springsat the beginning

FO FCEnd position switch

Slider

Gear

OPEN CLOSE

OPEN CLOSE and end

SIMOCODE pro

4-46 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Switching the direction of travel

It is possible to switch the direction of travel• via the OFF control command• if the signal “Feedback ON” is no longer issued (motor was switched off)


SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the “interlocking time“.

Notes

Attention

The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated end position switch when the torque switch (TO)/(TC) is connected.In this case, the slider is switched off immediately with the fault message “Fault - blocked slider”. If both end position switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the slider is immediately switched off via the fault message “Fault - double 1” (=“close”)If both torque switches respond at the same time (TO=0 and TC=0), the slider is switched off immediately with the fault message “Fault - double 0”.If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command, the slider is switched off with the fault message “Fault - end position fault”.


Motor Control

Slider schematic

Figure 4-18: Slider schematic

Control commands Contactor controls

Displays

Status -

QE1

QE2

QLE<

QLA

QLE>

QLS

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON<

OFF

ON>

OPEN

Stop

(Fault)

CLOSE

* Abbreviations

Feed-back ON

Feedback ON

FC Feedback CLOSE

FO Feedback OPEN

TC Torque CLOSE

TO Torque OPEN


Feedback ON

FC

FO

TC

TO

OPEN

CLOSE

OPEN

Stop

CLOSE

Protecting/controlling

Feedback time

Execution time

Interlocking time

Non-maintained

Load type

Slider

Motor protection

Interlocking time

active

Closes

Opens

FC

FO

TC

TO

command mode

SIMOCODE pro

4-48 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Variants for slide control

The following table shows the 5 variants for slide control:

Table 4-17: Variants for slide control

Notes

Attention

The signals of the torque switches and the position switches must be wired to the inputs of the basic units. Torque switches must be O-active, whereas the position switches must be 1-active.

Variant

Switch off

TCTorque

CLOSE

FCEnd position

CLOSE

FOEnd position

OPEN

TOTorque OPEN

Slider 1

After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC (CLOSE).

— X X —

Slider 2

After reaching the end position FO (OPEN) or FC (CLOSE) AND response of the associated torque switch TO (OPEN) or TC (CLOSE)

X X X X

Slider 3

After reaching the end position FO (open). After reaching the end posi-tion 'CLOSE', the respective torque switch TC must respond after the end position switch FC has respon-ded.

X X X —

Slider 4

After reaching the end position FC (CLOSE). After reaching the end position FO (OPEN), the respective torque switch TO must also respond after the end position switch FO has responded.

— X X X

Slider 5

After reaching the end position or the torque. The actuator is either monito-red by the end position switches or by the torque switches. The swit-ches are implemented as changeo-ver contacts and are checked for antivalence. In the case of non-anti-valent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and TC=0), SIMOCODE recognizes a wire break and deactivates the slider with the fault message “Fault - anti-valence”

Antivalent active Antivalent active

CLOSE OPEN


Motor Control

Settings


Dahlander with

reversal of the

direction of

rotation

Description

ON< ON< control command (close)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON<” socket)

OFF Control command stop(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - OFF” socket)

ON> ON> control command (open)(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)


FC Auxiliary control input “Feedback CLOSE” (connection with arbi-trary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the end position switch is wired to)

FO Auxiliary control input “Feedback OPEN” (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the limit switch is wired to)

TC Auxiliary control input “Torque CLOSE” (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque switch is wired to)

TO Auxiliary control input “Torque CLOSE” (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with the socket of an input which the torque switch is wired to)





Execution time Time until the limit position is reached.range: 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Interlocking time Range: 0 to 255 seconds

Table 4-18: Control function slider settings

SIMOCODE pro

4-50 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.2.15 Soft starters

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft star-ter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro.

Control commands

• Start with “ON >” activates the QE1 and QE4 internal contactor controls.• Stop with “OFF” first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the signal

“Feedback ON” is no longer issued, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft starter.

• With “reset”, the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and then sends the soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay out-put.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stationsto SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” sockets.

Every fault signal causes the contactor controls to be deactivated.


You have to make the following assignments:

1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of the network contactor

2. Assign the QE4 contactor control to an arbitrary relay output with which the “ON input” from the soft starter is to be activated

3. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the acknow-ledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter

4. Assign the “ON>” and “OFF” control commands to the enabled control com-mands

5. Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro that is connected to the signaling output “fault” of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module “exter-nal fault 1”.

6. The signal “End of start-up” of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the outputs and processed by SIMOCODE.

Note

Attention

In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the “Execution time” parame-ter in SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the smooth running down time of the soft starter.


Motor Control

Soft starter schematic

Figure 4-19: Soft starter schematic

Settings


Circuit breakers Description



Feedback ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON”(connection with arbitrary socket , usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket)





Execution time At least > smooth running down time.range 0 to 6553.5 seconds

Table 4-19: Soft starter settings

Control commands

Aux. control inputs

Contactor controls

Status

QE1

F ON*

QLA

QLE>

QLS

OFF

ON>

OFF

ON>


Feedback time

Execution time

Non-maintained

Load type

(ON>)

(OFF)

(Fault)

*Feedback ON

QE3

Displays

20 ms.

QE4 ON

Soft starter

Motor protection

Network contactor

command mode

SIMOCODE pro

4-52 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

4.2.16 Soft reversing starter

Description

With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft star-ter. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected to the PROFIBUS DP via SIMOCODE pro. With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the motor direction of rotation (forwards and backwards).

Control commands

• Start with “ON >” activates QE1 and QE4 contactor control (clockwise, i.e. forwards)

• Start with “ON <” activates QE2 and QE4 contactor control (counter-clock-wise i.e. backwards)

• Stop with “OFF” first deactivates the QE4 contactor control. When the “Feedback ON” signal is no longer issued, the QE1 / QE4 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a smooth run down via the soft star-ter.

• With “reset”, the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.

The control commands can be issued from arbitrary control stationsto SIMOCODE pro (see also the description of “control stations”). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the “Enabled control command” sockets.

Every fault signal causes the contactor activations to be deactivated.


It is possible to switching the direction of rotation• via the OFF control command• directly, when the “Save switching command” parameter is activated• if the “Status - ON>” or “Status - ON<” signal is no longer issued (motor was

switched OFF) AND after the interlocking time has expired.

SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.


Motor Control


You have to make the following assignments:

1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of the network contactor (right)

2. Assign the QE2 contactor control to the relay output that activates the coil of the network contactor (left)

3. Assign the QE4 contactor control to an optional relay output with which the “ON” input from the soft starter must be activated

4. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output which gives the acknow-ledgement signal of 20 ms to the soft starter

5. Assign the “ON>”, “ON<” and “OFF” control commands to the enabled con-trol commands

6. Assign the input of SIMOCODE pro which is connected to the signaling out-put “Fault” of the soft starter to the input of the standard function module “External fault 1”.

7. The “Start-up end” signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the outputs and processed by SIMOCODE pro.

Note

An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.

Soft reversing starter schematic

Figure 4-20: Soft reversing starter schematic

Control commands

Feedbacks

Contactor controls

Displays

Status -

QE2

F ON*

QLE<

QLA

QLE>

QLS

ON<

OFF

ON>

ON<

OFF

ON>


Feedback time

Execution time

Interlocking time

Non-maintained

Save switching

Load type

command

(ON>)

(OFF)

(Fault)

(ON<)

*Feedback ON

QE1

QE3

QE4

Right

Left

Soft reversing starterMotor protection

20 ms.

ON

Interlocking time

active

command mode

SIMOCODE pro

4-54 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Motor Control

Settings


Reversing starter Description

ON< ON< control command, counter-clockwise rotation(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON<” socket)


ON> ON> control command, clockwise rotation(connection with arbitrary socket ,usually with “Enabled control command - ON>” socket)

Feedback ON Auxiliary control input “Feedback ON” (connection with arbitrary socket , usually with “Status - current is flowing” socket)







Execution time At least > smooth running down time.Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds


Table 4-20: Soft reversing starter settings


Motor Control

4.3 Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and

status signal of the control functions

Table 4-21: Active control stations, contactor & lamp controls and status signalof the control functions

1) B

asic

uni

t 1,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oC

2) B

asic

uni

t 2,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oV

Spec

ifica

tion/

Cont

rol f

unct

ion

Cont

rol s

tatio

nCo

ntac

tor c

ontro

l

Lam

p co

ntro

l

QLE

<<(O

N<<

)Q

LE<

(ON

<)Q

LA(O

FF)

QLE

>(O

N>)

QLE

>>(O

N>>

)

Stat

us s

igna

l

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

Ove

rloa

d 1)

,2)

--

--

--

-Ac

tive

--

--

--

-

Dir

ect s

tart

er 1

),2)

--

OFF

ON-

ON-

--

--

OFF

ON-

Reve

rsin

g st

arte

r 1),2

)-

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Righ

tLe

ft-

--

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Circ

uit b

reak

er 1

),2)

--

OFF

ON-

ONim

puls

eOF

Fim

puls

e-

--

--

OFF

ON-

Star

-del

ta

star

ter 2

)-

-OF

FON

-St

arco

ntac

tor

Delta

cont

acto

rN

etw

ork

cont

acto

r-

--

-OF

FON

-

Star

-del

ta s

tarte

rw

ith re

vers

al o

f the

dire

ctio

n of

rota

tion

2)

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Star

cont

acto

rDe

ltaco

ntac

tor

Righ

tne

twor

kco

ntac

tor

Left

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-

Dah

land

er 2

)-

-OF

FSl

owFa

stFa

stSl

owFa

stst

arco

ntac

tor

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Dah

land

erw

ith re

vers

al o

f the

dire

ctio

n of

rota

tion

2)

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

slow

Fast

star

cont

acto

r

Left

slow

Left

fast

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Pole

cha

ngin

g sw

itch

2)-

-OF

FSl

owFa

stFa

stSl

ow-

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Pole

cha

ngin

g sw

itch

with

reve

rsin

g th

e di

rect

ion

of ro

tatio

n 2)

Left

fast

Left

slow

OFF

Righ

tsl

owRi

ght

fast

Righ

tfa

stRi

ght

slow

-Le

ftsl

owLe

ftfa

stLe

ftfa

stLe

ftsl

owOF

FRi

ght

slow

Righ

tfa

st

Valv

e 2)

--

Clos

edOp

en-

Open

--

--

--

Clos

edOp

en-

Slid

er 1

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Slid

er 2

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Slid

er 3

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Slid

er 4

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Slid

er 5

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Soft

star

ter 2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

-Re

set

ONco

mm

and

--

-OF

FON

-

Soft

reve

rsin

g st

arte

r2)

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-Ri

ght

netw

ork-

cont

acto

r

Left

netw

ork-

cont

acto

r

Rese

tON

com

man

d-

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-

SIMOCODE pro

4-56 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Monitoring Functions 5In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the monitoring functions• earth fault monitoring• current limit monitoring• operation monitoring.

Like motor protection and motor control, the monitoring functions work “in the background”. All parameters of the monitoring functions are explained. They can be active or not active, depending on the control function selected.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• programmers• commissioners• service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You need knowledge about:• SIMOCODE pro• motor protection, motor control• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• knowledge of electrical drive engineering.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES underDevice parameters > Monitoring functions.


Monitoring Functions

5.1 Earth-fault monitoring via current/voltage

measurement module

5.1.1 Description

SIMOCODE pro measures and monitors all three phase currents. By evalua-ting the summation current of the 3 current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a possible fault current/earth fault. The internal earth fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in net-works which are either grounded directly or grounded with a low impe-dance. On recognizing an earth fault, a definable and delayable response can be parameterized.

5.1.2 Internal earth fault

Response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro to an internal earth fault:For this, see also “Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel "Important Notes".

Figure 5-1: Internal earth fault monitoring

Table 5-1: Internal earth-fault monitoring” response

Response Internal

earth fault

Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn X

Switch off X

Delay 0 ... 25.5 s

Monitoring - Internal earth fault

Response to an internal earth fault

Delay of the internal earth fault

Current

- Internal earth fault

Seetable 5-1

Signal

Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

fromcurrentmeasure-ment

SIMOCODE pro

5-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


5.2 Current limit monitoring

5.2.1 Description

The current limit monitoring function is used - independently of the overload protection - for process monitoring. Exceeding a current limit which is still below the overload limit can e.g. indicate a dirty filter on a pump or a motor mounting which is running increasingly sluggishly. Falling below a current limit can be the first hint that a drive motor belt is worn-out. SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for upper and lower current limits which can be freely chosen. Here, the response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a pre-warning or trip level can be freely parame-terized and delayed.

Figure 5-2: Current limit monitoring

Trip level: I>

Response when I>

Delay when I>

Warning level: I>

Response when I>

Delay when I>

Trip level: I<

Response when I<

Delay when I<

Warning level: I<

Response when I<

Delay when I<

Hysteresis levels H

Signal

Signal

Signal

Currentfrom currentmeasure-

Seetable 5-2

Seetable 5-3

Seetable 5-4

Seetable 5-5

Current limit values

- Trip level I>

Signal- Warning level I>

- Trip level I<

- Warning level I<

ment



Diagram

The following diagram shows the warning level and trip level functions for the upper and lower current limits:

Figure 5-3: Warning levels and trip levels for the upper and lower current limits

Current

Triplevel I>

Warning level I>H

H

Warning level I<

Triplevel I<

Uppercurrentlimit

Lowercurrentlimit

H

H

0

H Hysteresis

SIMOCODE pro

5-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


5.2.2 I> (upper limit)

Trip level, warning level

With current limit monitoring I> (upper limit), 2 different synchronization levels, I> (upper limit) trip level and I> (upper limit) warning level, can be parameterized and monitored.If the current of one or more phases exceeds the synchronization level, the current limit monitoring is activated.

Range:

Trip level response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro if the trip level is excee-ded:For this, see also “Tables for the response of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel "Important Notes".

Table 5-2: “Trip level” response for current limit monitoring I>

Warning level response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro if the warning level is exceeded:For this, see also “Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel "Important Notes".

Table 5-3: “Warning level” response for current limit monitoring I>

Trip level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie

Warning level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn -

Switch off X

Delay 0 ... 25.5 s

Response Warning

level:

Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn X

Switch off -

Delay 0 ... 25.5 s



5.2.3 I< (lower limit)

Trip level, warning level

With current limit monitoring I< (lower limit), 2 different synchronization levels (trip level / warning level) can be parameterized and monitored. If the current of one or more phases falls below the synchronization level, the cur-rent limit monitoring is activated.

Range:

Trip level response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro on falling below the trip level:For this, see also “Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel "Important Notes".

Table 5-4: “Trip level” response for current limit monitoring I<

Warning level response

Here you can set the response of SIMOCODE pro on falling below the warning level:For this, see also “Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel "Important Notes".

Table 5-5: “Trip level” response for current limit monitoring I<

Trip level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie

Warning level: 0 up to 1020% of Ie

Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)

Signal X

Warn -

Switch off X

Delay 0 ... 25.5 s

Response Warning

level:

Deactivated X

Signal X

Warn X

Switch off -

Delay 0 ... 25.5 s

SIMOCODE pro

5-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


5.3 Operation monitoring

5.3.1 Description

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors because they were either running too long (wear-out) or they were stopped too long a period of time. For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal can be issued which can indicate that maintenance on the relevant motor is neces-sary or even that the motor should be replaced. After replacing the motor, the operating hours and stop times can be reset.In order to avoid excessive thermal strain on a motor and its premature aging, the number of motor start-ups in a selected time frame can be limited. The number of starts still possible is available for further processing in SIMOCODE pro. The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by pre-warnings.

Figure 5-4: Operation monitoring

Response

Table 5-6: “Operation monitoring” response

Response Monitoring

operating

hours - level

Stop time

monitoring -

level

Overshooting Number of

starts pre-

warning

Deactivated X (d) X (d) X (d) X (d)

Signal X X X X

Warn X X X X

Switch off - - X -

Operating hours level.

Response Signal

Controlfunctions

Operating hours

Motor operating hours

Stopped time level

Response Signal - Stop time >

Motor stop times

Stop time

Number of starts

Permissible starts

Start time frameNumber of motor starts

Overshoot response

Pre-warning response

Interlocking time

Signal

- Motor operating hours >

- Number of motor starts>

- Another start permitted

See

table 5-6

See

table 5-6

See

table 5-6

See

table 5-6

- No start permitted

Switchingoff

QE1QE2QE3QE4QE5

Operation monitoring



5.3.2 Operating hours monitoring

The operating hours monitoring function offers the option of generating maintenance prompts for the motor in good time.

Level

If the operating hours exceed the set synchronization level, the monitoring function is activated.

Range:

Response

Here you can set the overshooting response. For this, see also “Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel "Important Notes" and table 5-6.

5.3.3 Stop time monitoring

In system parts for important processes, dual drives are often in operation (A and B drives).It must be assured here that these drives are always alternately run to avoid long stop times and reduce the risk of non-availability.The stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to issue a warning which causes the other motor not presently in operation to be con-nected.

Level

The length of the stop time is set here. The monitoring function is activated when this stop time interval is exceeded.

Range:

Response

Here you can determine the response when the permissible stop time is exceeded:For this, see also “Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel "Important Notes" and table 5-6.

Level 0 to 1193046 hours

Level 0 to 65535 hours

SIMOCODE pro

5-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


5.3.4 Monitoring the number of starts

The function for monitoring the number of starts is used to protect system parts (motor, switching devices like e.g. soft starters and converters) against too many impermissible start processes inside a parameterizable time frame and thus to prevent damage from occurring. This is especially useful for start-up or manual control.The following schematic shows the principle of the function for monitoring the number of starts.

Figure 5-5: Monitoring the number of starts

Permissible starts

The maximum number of starts is set here. With the first start, the time interval “Start time frame” starts to run. After the second to the last permis-sible start has been executed, a pre-warning “Another start permitted” is issued.

Range:

Start time frame

The time frame of the start process is set here. The maximum number of starts is only available again after the parameterizable start time frame is finished.The available starts are shown by the analog value “Permissible starts - actual value”.

Range:

Overshooting response

Here you can set the response to be carried out when the permissible num-ber of starts within the start time frame have been exceeded:For this, see also “Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel "Important Notes" and table 5-6.

Permissible starts 1 to 255

Start time frame 0 to 65535 seconds

Time frame

1. Start within the time frame

t

Example:3 starts allowed

Pre-warning Overshooting



Pre-warning response

Here you can set the response to be carried out after the second to the last start:For this, see also “Tables for the Responses of SIMOCODE pro” in Kapitel "Important Notes" and table 5-6.

Interlocking time

If a new start command is issued within the time frame after the last per-missible start has been carried out, this new start command will no longer be executed by the setting “Overshoot response - switching off”. The “Fault - number of starts >” and the set interlocking time is activated.

Range:

Interlocking time 0 to 65535 seconds

SIMOCODE pro

5-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Outputs 6In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on the outputs ofSIMOCODE pro:• relay outputs• light-emitting diodes of the operator panel• signaling data on the PROFIBUS DP.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• planners and configurators• programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge: • the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• PROFIBUS DP.


Outputs

6.1 Introduction

Description

SIMOCODE pro has different outputs. The outputs include, for example: • output terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital

modules• LEDs on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state• outputs to the PROFIBUS DP.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the types of outputs:

Figure 6-1: General display of the types of outputs

SIMOCODE pro

DP PROFIBUS DP

LEDs operator panel

Output

Output

Output

Output terminals

SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro

Plugs

Plugs

Plugs

SIMOCODE pro

6-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Outputs


Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, displaying the sta-tus or signaling via PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different outputs, depending on the device series:

Table 6-1: Outputs

SIMOCODE

Outputs pro C

(BU1)

Number

pro V

(BU2)

Number

Basic unit BU, outputs 1 to 3 ✓ ✓

Operator panel LEDs ✓ ✓

Digital module 1 “DM1 - output 1 to 2” — ✓

Digital module 2 “DM2 - output 1 to 2” — ✓

Acyclic signaling data ✓ ✓

Cyclic signaling data ✓ ✓


Outputs

6.2 Basic unit (BU)

Description

The basic unit has a “BU - output” function block with 3 relay outputs. You can e.g. switch contactors or lamps using relay outputs. The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets. The “BU - output” function block consists of • 3 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3• 3 relays• output terminals

In total there is: – 1 “BU - output” function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the relay outputs:

Figure 6-2: BU output schematic

Application examples

• Controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder: You can e.g. define which relay output is used for controlling the motor con-tactor in the motor feeder. For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding “QE.” contactor control.

• Controlling lamps for displaying operating states: You can e.g. define which relay outputs are used for controlling lamps/LEDs which then display the operating states of the motor (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...). For this, connect the desired relay output to the corresponding “QL..” contactor control. These are specially designed for controlling lamps and LEDs: The “QL...” lamp controls also automatically signal to the status displays via a 2 Hz flashing frequency:

– test mode (QLE.../QLA lamp outputs are flashing)– unacknowledged fault case (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)– passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the

relay outputs– lamp test: all QL outputs are activated for approx. 2s

1

2

BU - output

3

1

2

3

6

7

Out1

Out2

Out3

Output terminals

Terminal numbers

SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro

6-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Outputs

Settings

BU output Description

Outputs 1 to 3 Controls the “BU-output” function block from an arbitrary signal(optional sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually from the QE contactor controls)

Table 6-2: BU output settings


Outputs

6.3 Operator panel (OP)

Description

SIMOCODE pro has an “OP - LED” function block with 7 LEDs. The LEDs are in the operator panel and can be used for arbitrary status displays. For this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. with the sockets for the status signals). The “OP - LED” function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and parameterized in the device configuration! The “OP - LED” function block contains• 4 inputs, “OP LED green 1” to “OP LED green 4”, corresponding to the green

LEDs. The green LEDs are optically/logically assigned to the buttons of the operator panel. They usually display the feedback of the motor operating state

• 3 inputs, “OP - LED yellow 1” to “OP - LED yellow 3”, corresponding to the yellow LEDs

• 4 green LEDs• 3 yellow LEDs

In total there is:– 1 “OP - LED” function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

Figure 6-3: OP LED schematic


• Displaying operating states: You can e.g. define which LEDs are to be activated for displaying the motor operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...).For this, connect the desired LED to the corresponding “QL” contactor con-trol.

• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow LEDs.

Yellow 1

Yellow 2

Yellow 3

Green 1

Green 2

Green 3

Green 4

OP - LED LEDs in the operator panel

QL

SIMOCODE pro

6-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Outputs

Settings

OP LED Description

Green 1 - green 4 Controls the “OP - LED” function block from an arbitrary signal(arbitrary sockets ,e.g. feedback operating state “motor”)

Yellow 1 - yellow 3 Controls the “OP - LED” function block from an arbitrary signal(arbitrary sockets e.g. displays for status, signals, faults)

Table 6-3: OP LED settings


Outputs

6.4 Digital modules (DM)

Description

Basic unit 2 (SIMOCODE pro V) provides the option of extending the num-ber of inputs and outputs as well as their types by degrees via expansion modules (digital modules). The basic unit has 2 function blocks: “Digital module 1 - output” and “Digital module 2 - output”, with 2 relay outputs each. You can e.g. switch contactors or lamps via the relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) must be connec-ted to the corresponding sockets. Function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) are connected and parameterized in the device configuration! Each function block contains• 2 plugs, corresponding to the relay outputs Out1, Out2• 2 relays• output terminals

In total there is– 1 function block “Digital module1 - output” BU2– 1 function block “Digital module2 - output” BU2.

The following digital modules are available for basic unit 2:

Table 6-4: Digital modules variations

With the monostable version, the relay outputs open after switching off the supply voltage. With the bistable version, the switching state of the relay outputs remains intact even after switching off the supply voltage.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the relay outputs:

Figure 6-4: DM1 / DM2 output schematic

Inputs Supply Outputs

4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 monostable relayoutputs

4 inputs 110... 240V AC/DC, external 2 monostable relayoutputs

4 inputs 24 V DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs

4 inputs 110... 240V AC/DC, external 2 bistable relay outputs

1

2

DM1 - output

Out1

Out2

1

2

DM2 - output

Out1

Out2

Output terminals Output terminals

SIMOCODE pro

6-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Outputs


• Controlling the motor contactor in the motor feeder:You can e.g. define which relay output is to be used for controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder.For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding “QE” con-tactor control.

• Controlling lamps for displaying the operating states:You can e.g. define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps/LEDs which then display the motor operating states (fault, ON, OFF, fast, slow...). For this, connect the desired relay output with the corresponding “QL...” lamp control.

• Passing on any other information, signals, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay outputs.

Settings

DM1 / DM2 output Description

Output 1 to 2 Controls the “DM1 output” and “DM2 output” function blocks from an arbitrary signal(arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc. (usually from the QE contactor controls)

Table 6-5: DM1 / DM2 output settings


Outputs

6.5 Cyclic signaling

Description

The “Cyclic signaling” function block is used to determine which informa-tion is given cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. For this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets.The “Cyclic signaling” function block consists of• 16 inputs (2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• 1 input (2 bytes, byte 2 and 3 for analog information, one freely paramete-

rizable word)• 1 output (PROFIBUS DP).In total there is– 1 “Cyclic signaling” function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

Figure 6-5: Cyclic signaling data schematic

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 0

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 1

Bit 3

Bit4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

to PROFIBUS DP

Input (analog)

Cyclic signaling

Byte 2/3

DP

SIMOCODE pro

6-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Outputs

Cyclic services

Cyclic signaling data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between the DP master and the DP slave. In this case, the DP master sends the cyclic con-trol data to SIMOCODE pro. In response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signaling data to the DP master.

Settings

Acyclic signaling

data

Description

Byte 0 to 1Bit 0 to bit 7

Controls the bits with arbitrary signals(arbitrary sockets e.g. device inputs, signaling data, etc.)

Byte 2/3 Controls the word with arbitrary analog signals(arbitrary sockets e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of timers, etc.)

Table 6-6: Test settings

Byte 0 of the signaling data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current!


Outputs

6.6 Acyclic signaling

Description

In addition to “Cyclic signaling”, it is also possible to transmit additional 16-bit information to the PLC/PC via acyclic services. The “Acyclic signaling” function block is used to determine which informa-tion is given acyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. For this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets.The “Acyclic signal” function block consists of• 16 inputs (2 bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• 1 logic component• 1 output (PROFIBUS DP).In total there is• 1 function block “Acyclic signaling” for the BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

Figure 6-6: Acyclic signaling data schematic

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 0

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 1

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

to PROFIBUS DP

Acyclic signaling

DP

SIMOCODE pro

6-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Outputs

Acyclic services

Acyclic signaling data is only transmitted on request. The information (2 bytes) is in data record 203.This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.

Settings

Acyclic signaling

data

Description

Byte 0 to 1Bit 0 to bit 7

Controls the bits with arbitrary signals(arbitrary sockets , e.g. device inputs, signaling data, state infor-mation, fault signals, etc.)

Table 6-7: Test settings


Outputs

SIMOCODE pro

6-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Inputs 7In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information on the inputs of SIMOCODE pro.The inputs include:• the four inputs of the basic units (BU1, BU2)• the four inputs of digital modules 1 and 2 (DM1, DM2).

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• planners and configurators• planners.

Necessary knowledge

You need knowledge about:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Device parameters > Inputs.


Inputs

7.1 Introduction

Description

SIMOCODE pro has different inputs (input terminals). These inputs provide external information. They are interfaces from the outside to SIMOCODE pro. These inputs become sockets inside SIMOCODE pro. The inputs contain:• input terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital

modules• buttons on the operator panel (1 button test/reset, 4 freely parameterizable

buttons) and basic units (1 button test/reset)• inputs from PROFIBUS DP.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the general representation of the input types:

Figure 7-1: General representation of the input types

SIMOCODE pro

DPPROFIBUS DP

Input

Input

Input

Input terminals

SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro

Buttons- Control commands- Test/reset

Sockets

Sockets

Sockets

SIMOCODE pro

7-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Inputs

Scope and application

Inputs are used, for example, for inputting external signals e.g. via pushbut-tons, key-operated switches, etc. These external signals are processed fur-ther internally via corresponding connections. Depending on the device series, the system provides different inputs:

SIMOCODE

Inputs pro C

(BU1)

Number

pro V

(BU2)

Number

Basic unit “BU - inputs 1 to 4” ✓ ✓

Operator panel buttons ✓ ✓

Digital module 1 “DM1 - inputs 1 to 4” — ✓

Digital module 2 “DM2 - inputs 1 to 4” — ✓

Acyclic control data ✓ ✓

Cyclic control data ✓ ✓

Table 7-1: Inputs


Inputs

7.2 Basic unit (BU)

Description

The basic unit has a function block “BU - input” with 4 grouped digital inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. In order for these signals to be further processed, the plugs of other function blocks, e.g. a control station, must be connected to the correspon-ding sockets.The function block “BU - input” consists of• input terminals , located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to

the sockets “BU - input 1” to “BU - input 4”• 24 V DC internally for supplying the inputs of the basic unit• outputs in the form of sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to

any plugs, e.g. to the control stations.

In total there is:– 1 function block “BU - input” for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the inputs of the basic unit

Figure 7-2: Schematic BU - Input

Application example

The inputs can be used, for example, to connect the start and stop buttons of the local control station - which can then be assigned to the “local con-trol” internal control station.Via the corresponding assignments, the input signals can be used to acti-vate, for example, function blocks such as “Reset” or “External fault”.

Basic unit (BU)

8

5

4

10

9

BU - Inputs

1

2

3

4

Terminalnumbers

24 V DC

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

internally

SIMOCODE pro

7-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Inputs

Supplying the inputs

You have three possibilities for supplying the inputs:• a): 24 V DC internal.• b): 24 V DC external. However, input 3 is reference potential, i.e. 3 inputs are

available.• c): 24 V DC external. Only possible for the basic unit with a supply

voltage of 24 V DC!

Figure 7-3: 24 V DC for supplying the inputs

Settings

All inputs work reaction-free, i.e. the signal states on the neighboring inputs do not influence each other.

Basic unit Description

Debounce time Inputs

If necessary, you can set a debounce time for the inputs.Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default setting: 16 ms).

Table 7-2: BU - input settings

Basic unit (BU)

BU - input

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

24 V DC internal, 4 inputs usable

Basic unit (BU)

BU - input

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

24 V DC external, 3 inputs usable

Basic unit (BU)

BU - input

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

24 V DC external, 4 inputs usable

A1

A2

a) b) c)

Only possible for the basic unit

24 V DC

(not usable)

with a supply voltage of 24 V DC!


Inputs

7.3 Digital modules (DM)

Description

The digital module has a function block “BU - input” with 4 grouped digital inputs. You can connect e.g. the buttons for a local control station to the inputs. In order for these signals to be further processed, the plugs of other function blocks, e.g. a control station, must be connected to the correspon-ding sockets.The function block “DM - input” consists of• input terminals , located on the outside of the digital module, correspon-

ding to the sockets “DM - input 1” to “DM - input 4”• outputs in the form of sockets in SIMOCODE pro which can be connected to

any plugs, e.g. to the control stations.

In total there is:– 1 function block “DM1 - Input” and “DM2 - Input” for BU2.

Schematic

The following schematic shows the inputs of the digital module

Figure 7-4: Schematic of DM inputs

Application example

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the number of binary inputs and outputs on basic device 2.• Up to 2 digital modules can be connected. Thus, 4 further binary inputs and 2

further binary outputs are available in each case.• Supplying the inputs (only externally, not via BU1/2) 24 V DC or

110 V up to 240 V AC/DC.

SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of 12 binary inputs and 7 binary outputs.

Digital module (DM)

25

23

24

26

27

DM - inputs

1

2

3

4

Terminalnumbers

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

N/M

SIMOCODE pro

7-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Inputs

Supplying the inputs

There are two versions of the digital module:• a): Digital module with 24 V DC input supply• b): Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply.

Figure 7-5: Supplying the inputs for the digital module

Settings

Basic unit Description

Debounce time Inputs

If necessary, you can set a debounce time for the inputs.Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms. Default setting: 16 ms.These values are valid for digital modules with a 24 V DC input sup-ply.For digital modules with a 110 to 240 V AC/DC input supply, the values are about 40 ms higher.

Table 7-3: BU - input settings

24 V DC external 110 V up to 240 V AC/DC external

Digital module (DM)

DM - inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

N/M

Digital module (DM)

DM - inputs

1

2

3

4

IN1

IN2

IN3

IN4

N/M

~

a) b)


Inputs

7.4 Cyclic controlling

Description

With the “Cyclic controlling” function block, you can transfer information cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP. For this, the inputs (plugs) must be assigned to the corresponding outputs (sockets).The function block “Cyclic controlling” consists of• 16 outputs (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• 1 input PROFIBUS DP.In total there is:– 1 function block “Cyclic controlling” for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

Figure 7-6: Schematic cyclic control data

Cyclic services

The cyclic data is exchanged once in every DP cycle between DP master and DP slave. The DP master sends the cyclic control data (cyclic con-trolling) to SIMOCODE pro. As a response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic signal data (cyclic send) to the DP master.

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 0

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 1

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Cyclic controlling

DP from PROFIBUS DP

SIMOCODE pro

7-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Inputs

7.5 Acyclic controlling

Description

In addition to “Cyclic controlling”, there is also the option of transferring fur-ther 16-bit information via the function block “Acyclic controlling”.You can determine which information should be transferred acyclically via PROFIBUS DP to the automation system. For this, the outputs (sockets) must be assigned to the corresponding plugs.The function block “Acyclic controlling” consists of• 16 outputs (2 byte, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)• 1 input (PROFIBUS DP).In total there is:• 1 function block “Acyclic controlling” for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

Figure 7-7: Schematic of acyclic control data

Cyclic services

Acyclic data is only transferred on request.The information (2 bytes) is in record 202.This record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) which supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 0

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Byte 1

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Acyclic controlling

Byte 2/3

DP from PROFIBUS DP


Inputs

SIMOCODE pro

7-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Standard Function Blocks 8In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about standard function blocks which you can activate as required. Standard function blocks often contain functions needed for motor feeders and are characterized by simple hand-ling.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• programmers of application programs for comprehension purposes.

Necessary knowledge

You need knowledge about:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• motor protection• control functions, control stations.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:More function blocks > Standard functions.


Standard Function Blocks

8.1 Introduction

Description

The system also contains so-called “standard function blocks” which can be used if required. They can contain:• inputs (plug )• outputs (sockets ) via a signal• setting values, e.g. the response when external faults occur (“Signal”, “Warn”

or “Switch off”).

Schematic

The following schematic shows the general functioning of a standard function block:

Figure 8-1: General functioning of a standard function block

Scope and application

Standard function blocks work independently of the selected control function and can be used as optional additions. They are already available, and just have to be activated, which is achieved by wiring up the input (“External fault” standard function block).Depending on the device range, the system provides several function blocks:

SIMOCODE

Standard function block pro C(BU1)

Number

pro V(BU2)

Number

Test 2 2

Reset 3 3

Test position feedback (TPF) 1 1

External fault 4 6

Operational protection off (OPO) — 1

Power failure monitoring (UVO) — 1

Emergency start 1 1

Watchdog (monitoring PLC/DCS) 1 1

Timestamping — 1

Table 8-1: Standard function blocks

Signal

Input 1

Input n

Standard function block

Setting value

SIMOCODE pro

8-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


8.2 Test/reset

Test/reset description

The function of the “test/reset” button is generally dependent on the opera-ting status of the device:• Reset function: when a fault occurs• Test function: other operating statuses

The “Test” function block consists of:• 1 Input• a logic component (test/reset buttons locked).

In total there are:• 2 Test 1 and Test 2 function blocks for BU1 and BU2:– Test 1: with testing/switching off the output relays– Test 2: without switching off the output relays (normally for a test via the

bus).

Schematic

Figure 8-2: Schematic "Test/Reset"

Carrying out the test

The test can be carried out as follows:• using the “test/reset” button on the basic unit and operator panel (can be

deactivated)• “Test input 1/2” of the internal function block

The test function can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal motor model/overload function, i.e. after switching off using Test, it can immediately be switched back again.Switching off only occurs for Test 1 if the operation type is set to “Remote”.

Reset 3

Test 1

Test/Reset buttons locked

Test 2

Reset 1

Reset 2

Botton "TEST/RESET" BU

control functions

Test/Reset

Botton "TEST/RESET" OP



Reset function:

The reset function can be carried out as follows:• using the “test/reset” button on the basic unit and operator panel (can be

deactivated)• using the “Reset input” of the internal function blocks

The inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets.

The “Reset” function block consists of:• 1 Input.

In total there are:– 3 function blocks, “Reset 1 to 3” for BU1 and BU2.All reset inputs are equal (OR function).

Test function

A function test of SIMOCODE pro can also be installed using the test function.The test function contains the following steps:• Lamp/LED test (test function activated < 2 s)• Testing the device functionality (test function activated 2 to 5 s)• Only for “Test 1”: Switching off the QE (test function activated > 5 s).

SIMOCODE pro

8-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Test phases

The following table shows the test phases carried out when the “test/reset” button is pressed for the respective period of time:

Settings test

Testphase

Status Without main current With main current

O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault

Hardware test/lamp test

< 2 s“DEVICE” LED Green Green Green Green

“GEN.FAULT” LED

Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged

Show QL*

Hardware/lamp test result

2 s - 5 s“DEVICE” LED Green Red Green Rot

“GEN.FAULT” LED

Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated

Relay test

> 5 s“DEVICE” LED Green Red Green Rot

“GEN.FAULT” LED

Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated

LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off

*) “Fault” displayed after 2 s

Table 8-2: Statuses of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test

Test 1 to 2 - Description

Input Activates the “Test” function block from any signal(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Test/reset button locked

The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are designed for acknowledgement of faults and for carrying out device tests.The keys can be locked using “Test/reset button locked”. They can then be used for other purposes.

Table 8-3: Settings test



Acknowledging reset fault

The following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:• faults can be simply acknowledged– when the cause of the fault has been eliminated– if no “ON” control command is present.• No reset will be carried out when a reset command is issued if the cause of

the fault or an “ON” control command is still present. The reset is saved, depending on the type of fault. The saving of the reset is indicated by the “GEN.FAULT” LED on the basic unit and the control panel. The LEDs change from flashing to a continuous signal.

Automatic acknowledgement of fault reset

The acknowledgement of faults occurs automatically in the following cases:• Case 1: A reset is saved and the cause of the fault disappears (user pre-

viously acknowledged)• Case 2: An overload tripping or thermistor tripping is automatically reset if

motor protection reset = Auto (the acknowledgement occurs automatically after the cooling off time expires). The motor cannot start immediately since a reset cannot occur if an ON command is present.

• Case 3: If a configured module fails, all associated faults are automatically acknowledged. However, a removal fault is generated (exception: operating panel during the corresponding parameterization). This ensures that a module fault does not cause the general fault to be acknowledged automatically.

• Case 4a: If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via a parameterization), all associated faults are acknowledged automatically (the motor cannot start immediately since no parameter can be entered if an ON command is present).

• Case 4b: If a function's parameter is changed from “Switch off” to “Warn”, “Signal” or “Deactivated”, all associated faults are automatically acknowled-ged.

• For an external fault: with its own parameter: “Auto reset”.

Reset setting

Reset 1 to 3 - Description

Input Activates the “Reset” function block from any signal(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Test/reset button locked

The blue test/reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel are designed for acknowledgement of faults and carrying out device tests.The keys can be locked using “Test/reset button locked”. They can then be used for other purposes.

Table 8-4: Reset setting

SIMOCODE pro

8-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


8.3 Test position feedback (TPF)

Description

You can carry out the “Cold starting” function test using the “test position feedback (TPF)” function. The input (plug) must be connected to the corre-sponding socket. The active test position is indicated by a flashing QL*.The “Test position feedback (TPF)” function block consists of• 1 Input• 1 “Status - test position” output

This is set when a signal is connected to the input.• 1 “Fault - test position feedback fault” output.

It is set when– “TPF” is activated, even if current is flowing in the motor feeder– “TPF” is activated, and current is flowing in the motor feeder

In total there is– 1 “Test position” function block for BU1 and BU2.

Notice:

When the test position is activated, the QLE/QLA outputs are controlled by flashing.

Schematic

Figure 8-3: “Feedback test position” schematic

Cold starting

If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network. However, the control voltage is connected.The “Cold starting” function test is carried out in this status. Cold starting is defined as the testing of the motor feeder without a current in the main cir-cuit.This function must be activated via an input to differentiate this function from normal operation.The feedback that the motor feeder is isolated from the mains voltage can be achieved using an auxiliary contact of the main switch in the motor fee-der which is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then linked to the “Test position feedback (TPF)” input.Following this, the protection outputs can be set using the enabled control stations (see chapter "Control stations" on page 4-2), which enables the cur-rent-free status to be tested.If current falsely flows during the test operation, the contactor outputs are switched off with the message “Fault - Test position feedback fault”.

InputFault -Feedback fault test position

Status -Test positionTPF

Type



“Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)” fault message and acknowledgement

Attention

“Fault - Test position feedback (TPF)” is generated when:• “TPF” is activated, even if current is flowing in the motor feeder• “TPF” is activated, and current is flowing in the motor feeder

It can be acknowledged using “Reset” or the “OFF/STOP” control com-mand.

Settings

External fault

1 to 6 -

Description

Input Controls the “test position feedback (TPF)” using any signal (any sockets ,e.g. device input)

Type Specifies the input logic• NO contact (1-active)• NC contact (0-active)

Table 8-5: Test position feedback (TPF) setting

SIMOCODE pro

8-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


8.4 External fault

Description

“External faults 1-6” can optionally be used to monitor any statuses and/or external devices and to create fault messages. In order to do this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.). Example: monitoring the rotational speed of the motor using an external rotational-speed monitor.The “External fault” function block consists of• 2 inputs• evaluation• 1 “Signal - external fault” output. This is set when a signal is connected to

the input.

In total there are:– 4 external fault function blocks (1 to 4) for BU1– 6 external fault function blocks (1 to 6) for BU2.

Schematic

Figure 8-4: Schematic of external faults

Special reset possibilities:

A reset input is also available in addition to the other reset possibilities (remote reset, test/reset button, OFF command reset). Furthermore, auto reset can also be activated.For this, see the chapter "“External fault” signal" on page 8-10.

Signal -Input

Type

Reset

External fault 1

Type

Effectiveness

Response

Reset

(Labeling)

Ext. fault 1Signal -

InputType

Reset

External fault 2

Type

Effectiveness

Response

Reset

(Labeling)

Ext. fault 2

Signal -Input

Type

Reset

External fault 3

Type

Effectiveness

Response

Reset

(Labeling)


InputType

Reset

External fault 4

Type

Effectiveness

Response

Reset

(Labeling)

Ext. fault 4

Signal -Input

Type

Reset

External fault 5

Type

Effectiveness

Response

Reset

(Labeling)


InputType

Reset

External fault 6

Type

Effectiveness

Response

Reset

(Labeling)

Ext. fault 6



Settings

“External fault” signal

Table 8-7: “External fault” signal

External faults

1 to 6 -

Description

Input Activates the “External fault” function block using the monitored signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)Status:

Type Specifies the input logic:• NO contact (1-active)• NC contact (0-active) (default setting)

Effectiveness Specifies in which motor operating status the external fault should be evaluated:• Always:

Always evaluate, regardless of whether the motor is running or stationary.

• only when the motor is on:Evaluation only when the motor is switched on.

Response Specifies the response to an external fault when activated using the input. (See the following table and the Kapitel "Important Notes")

Reset Acknowledges the “External fault” fault using any signal(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset also through Specifies further (common) acknowledgement possibilities using additional reset types:• Test/reset button on the basic unit and the control panel (panel

reset)• Remote reset: Acknowledgement though resets 1-3, DPV1,

“Reset” command• Auto reset: Fault resets itself after the cause of the fault has been

eliminated (after removal of the activation signal)• OFF command reset: “OFF” control command resets the fault.

(Labelling) No parameters. Optional labelling to describe the signal, e.g. “´Rotational speed >”, e.g. using SIMOCODE ES.Range: up to 10 characters

Table 8-6: External fault settings

Response External fault

Fault / switch off X

Warning X

Signal X

Disabled

Delay -

SIMOCODE pro

8-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


8.5 Operational protection OFF (OPO)

8.5.1 Response for slider control function

Description

This function puts the slider into the safe mode. In order to do this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).The “Operational protection off” function block consists of• 1 Input• 1 “Status - OPO” output. This is set when a signal is connected to the input.• 1 “Fault - OPO fault” output. It is set when the corresponding, safe end posi-

tion is reached.

In total there is:– 1 function block Operational protection off (OPO) for BU2.

The following table shows the main functionality:

Table 8-8: Main functionality of Operational protection off (OPO) for slider control function

Schematic

Figure 8-5: Operational protection off (OPO) schematic

OPO Initial position when OPO occurs

Slider is open Slider opens Slider stop-

ped/off

Slider closes Slider is clo-

sed

Reaction to OPO

Parameterized “Slider clo-sed” response

FaultReset: with close com-mand

Closes


Closes


Closes

-

Closes

-

Parameterized “Slider open” response

- -

Opens

FaultReset: with open command

Opens


Opens


Opens

Input

Fault -Operational protection off (OPO)

Status -Operational

Slider response

Type

Operational protection off (OPO)protection off (OPO)



Settings

Notes

• No “Fault - Operational protection off (OPO)” fault message is created if the “OPO” command tries to move the slider to the position where it already is or to the position towards which it is already heading.

• No other control command (counter command or stop command) is carried out while “Operational protection off (OPO)” is active.

• The “Fault - Operation protection off (OPO)” fault message must be acknow-ledged using the open or close control command, depending on the slider's present end position.

• The acknowledgement is carried out even if the desired end position has not yet been reached.

• The fault message can be used to diagnose the PROFIBUS DP.

8.5.2 Response to other control functions

Description

For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated if OPO is used:• The motor is running: The motor switches off with a “Fault - Operational pro-

tection off (OPO)” fault.• The motor is off. Initially no fault. The “Fault - Operational protection off

(OPO)” fault only occurs when the “ON command” is issued.

Operational

protection off

(OPO) -

Description

Input Activates of the “Operational protection off” function block using the monitored signal(any sockets , e.g. device inputs, etc.)

Slider response Specifies the response for the slider control function when activa-ted via the input:• CLOSE: Slider goes to the “Closed” end position• OPEN: Slider goes to the “Open” end position

Type Species the input logic• NO contact (1-active)• NC contact (0-active)

Table 8-9: Operational protection off settings

SIMOCODE pro

8-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


8.6 Power failure monitoring (UVO)

Description

The “Power failure monitoring (UVO)” is activated using the input. This is achieved using an external relay.Process (see process diagram below).1) All contactors (QE) are immediately deactivated after the monitoring-input

relay/activation of the input (UVO) have been addressed.

2) The motor switches back into its previous status if the voltage returns within the “Power failure time”. This can either take place immediately or an additio-nal time delay can be included (restart delay).

3) If the “Power failure time” expires before the voltage returns, the device signals a fault (UVO fault).

Condition: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and is not inter-rupted.

Schematic

Figure 8-6: Power failure monitoring (UVO) process diagram

Figure 8-7: Power failure monitoring (UVO)

Input*

Fault -Power failure monitoring (UVO)

UVO

Type

Power failure time*ActivationExternal power failure monitoringRestart delay

QE

t

Power failuretime

Power failuretime

UVO

t

Fault

t

Fault

1)

2)

3)



Settings

Power failure

monitoring (UVO) -

Description

Input Activates the “Power failure monitoring” function block using the monitored signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Specifies the type of power failure monitoring:• deactivated• device supply is not interrupted

The control voltage from SIMOCODE pro remains constant.The interruption of the mains voltage must be measured by a separate voltage relay (for example).

Power failure time The time at which the power failure starts.If the mains voltage returns within the power failure time period, all the drives that were connected before the power failure are auto-matically reconnected.If the mains voltage does not return within this time period, the drives remain disconnected and the “Fault - Power failure UVO” fault message is generated.The fault message can be acknowledged using “Reset” once the mains voltage returns.Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds

Restart delay (stag-gered)

The restart delay can be set so that not all motors restart at the same time (mains voltage would collapse again).Range: 0 to 255 seconds

Table 8-10: Power failure monitoring settings

SIMOCODE pro

8-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


8.7 Emergency start

Description

The emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated. This enables the motor to restart immediately after an overload tripping.This function can be used to:– make an immediate restart/reset possible after an overload switch-off– influence the operation of the thermal memory (motor model) if required.Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, it is not possible for this function to continuously affect the thermal motor model.The emergency start is carried out as follows:• Via the input. In order to do this, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to any

sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.).

The “Emergency start” function block consists of:• 1 Input• 1 “Status - emergency start carried out” output. It is set when the emer-

gency start is carried out.

In total there is:– 1 emergency start function block for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

Figure 8-8: Emergency start schematic

Settings

1) The “Emergency start carried out” signal is triggered by the edge (input) and reset when current flows.

Emergency start - Description

Input Activates the “Emergency start” function block using any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Table 8-11: Emergency start settings

Input

Status -Emergency startEmergency startcarried out 1)



8.8 Watchdog (bus monitoring, PLC/DCS monitoring)

Description

The “Watchdog” standard function block monitors both the communication with the PLC using PROFIBUS DP as well as the operating status of the PLC in the “Remote” operation type.

Schematic

Bus monitoring:

With this type of monitoring, “Fault - Bus” is generated if• “Bus monitoring” is active• the cyclic data transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted,

e.g. by an interruption to the PROFIBUS DP connection when in the “Remote” operation type (operation type switch S1=1 and S2=1).

• The “Status - Bus O.K.” can always be evaluated. If the SIMOCODE pro is cyclically transferring data with PLC, the “Status - Bus O.K.” is set to “1”.

Figure 8-9: Bus monitoring

Response: Also see Table 8-13: “Bus fault” / “PLC/DCS fault” response and Kapitel "Important Notes".

PLC/DCS monitoring:

With this type of monitoring, “Fault - PLC/DCS” is generated if• “PLC/DCS monitoring” is activated.• the PROFIBUS DP switches to the “CLEAR” status when in the “Remote”

operation type (operation type switch S1=1 and S2=1).• “Status - PLC/DCS in Run” can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP is in

the “CLEAR” status, the “Status - PLC/DCS in Run” is set to “0”.

If the “PLC/DCS monitoring - input” is set by default to the “Cyclic control - Bit 0.7” bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit alone.

Bus fault

Watchdog (Bus monit.)

Bus/PLC-fault - Reset

Bus monitoringCyclic communication

Status - Bus O.K.(Bus active)

Bus response

SIMOCODE pro

8-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Figure 8-10: PLC/DCS monitoring

Response: See also Table 8-13: “Bus fault” / “PLC/DCS fault” response and Kapitel "Important Notes".

“Bus fault” / “PLC/DCS fault” response

Table 8-13: “Bus fault” / “PLC/DCS fault” response

Watchdog - Description

PLC/DCS monito-ring - input

Activates the “Watchdog” function block using the monitored signal(optional sockets , e.g. control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Bus monitoring • Activated:If a bus fault occurs, the “Fault - Bus” fault message is genera-ted, which must be acknowledged

• Deactivated:No fault message

MonitoringPLC/DCS

• Activated:If an SPS fault occurs, the “Fault - PLC/DCS” fault message is generated, which must be acknowledged

• Deactivated:No fault message

Bus/PLC fault - reset

You can select whether the faults are acknowledged automatically or manually.Range: Manual / automatic

Table 8-12: Watchdog settings

Response Bus fault PLC/DCS fault

Fault X X

Warning - -

Signal - -

Not active X X

PLC/DCS monitoring - inputFault - PLC/DCS

Watchdog (PLC/DCS monit.)

Bus/PLC-fault - Reset

Bus monitoringCyclic communication Status - PLC/DCS in Run

(level sensitive)

PLC/DCS monitoring



8.9 Timestamping

8.9.1 Time stamping in the fault memory

The time stamping in the fault memory is based on the operating hours of SIMOCODE pro (resolution: 1 s).The “Error/ Fault” events and “Mains on” are recorded. Each of these events is annotated with a timestamp.• Error / Fault:

The last 21 faults are stored in a ring buffer. The fault that occurs (rising edge) is always recorded. A fault that is disappearing (falling edge) is not recorded.

• Mains on:If the most recent entry was “Mains on”, this is not recorded multiple times. Rather, the fault number is used as a network-on fault. This means that the fault memory cannot be deleted by frequent ON/OFF operations.

Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.The data is displayed using the “SIMOCODE ES” software.

Example:

Figure 8-11: Example of event recording using the “SIMOCODE ES” software

Screenshot

SIMOCODE pro

8-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules 9In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the logic modules of SIMOCODE pro. In addition to the predefined control functions, you can, for example, implement logical functions, time relays functions and counter functions.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• programmers.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge: • the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timer, counter etc.


You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under:Further function blocks > Logic modules.


Logic Modules

9.1 Introduction

Description

Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input signals and provide digital output signals. Logic modules can contain:• inputs (plugs )• an internal logic component• outputs (sockets ) • settings, e.g. the time for a timer.

Schematic

The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:

Figure 9-1: General representation of a logic module


If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions and counter functions.Depending on the device series, the system provides several logic modules:

SIMOCODE

BU1

Number

BU2

Number

Truth tables for 3 inputs/1 output 3 6

Truth tables for 2 inputs/1 output — 2

Truth tables for 5 inputs/2 outputs — 1

Timers 2 4

Counters 2 4

Signal conditioners 2 4

Non-volatile elements 2 4

Flashing 3 3

Flickering 3 3

Limit monitor — 4

Table 9-1: Logic modules which can be programmed freely

Logic moduleInput 1

Input n

Output(Logic component)

Setting

SIMOCODE pro

9-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

9.2 Truth table for 3I/1O

Description

The truth table for 3I/1O contains• 3 inputs• a logic component• 1 output.

You can choose among 8 possible input conditions with which you want to create an output signal.

In total there are:– 3 truth tables, 1 to 3, for BU1– 6 truth tables, 1 to 6, for BU2

Schematic

Figure 9-2: Schematic truth tables for 3I/1O

Truth table1, 3I/1OInput 1

Input 2

Input 3

Output

Truth table 3, 3I/1OInput 1

Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Input 2

Input 3

Output


Logic Modules

Example

You want to implement the following circuit:

Figure 9-3: Example of a truth table

Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:

S1=Input 1

S2=Input 2

S3=Input 3

K1=Output

0 0 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 1 0 0

0 1 1 1

1 0 0 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1

S1 S2

S3

K1

Circuit:

K1 switches with:(S1 or S2) and S3orS1 and S2 and S3

SIMOCODE pro

9-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

Switching and parameterizing

Figure 9-4: Example circuit and parameterization for truth table for 3I/1O

Settings

Truth table for 1-6

3I/1O -

Description

Input 1 to 3 Activate the truth table with any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Table 9-2: Settings for 3I/1O truth table

S2

S3

S1

Circuit:

1

2

BU output

Out1

3


Input 2

Input 3

Output

BU input

1

2

3

4

L1

NK1

BU

Connecting inputs, i.e. connecting the plugs with the sockets

Setting of bitsParameterization with SIMOCODE ES

for output signals


Logic Modules


Description

The truth table for 2I/1O contains• 2 inputs• a logic component• 1 output.

You can choose among 4 possible input conditions with which you want to create an output signal.

In total there are:– 2 truth tables 7 to 8 for BU2

Schematic

Figure 9-5: Schematic for 2I/1O truth tables

Example

You want to implement the following circuit:

Figure 9-6: Example for 2I/1O truth table

Truth table 7 2I/1OInput 1

Input 2

OutputTruth table 8 2I/1O

Input 1

Input 2

Output

Truth table, input conditions colored in gray:

S1=Input 1

S2=Input 2

K1=Output

0 0 0

0 1 1

1 0 1

1 1 1

S1 S2

K1

Circuit:

K1 switches with :S1 or S2

SIMOCODE pro

9-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules


Description

The truth table 5I/2O contains• 5 inputs• a logic component• 2 outputs.

You can choose among 32 possible input conditions with which you want to create up to 2 output signals.

In total there are:– 1 truth table 9 for BU2.

Schematic

Figure 9-7: Schematic 5I/2O truth table

Settings

Truth table 9 for 5I/

2O -

Description

Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Table 9-3: Settings for truth table for 5I/2O

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Output 1

Input 4

Input 5

Output 2

Truth table 9 for 5I/2O


Logic Modules

9.5 Counters

Description

Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated via the inputs “+” or “-”.The counter output switches to “1” when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with “Reset”.The current count value can be read out cyclically via the bus. It must be entered as an analog value. • Input +: increases actual value by 1• Input –: decreases actual value by 1 (minimum: 0).• Reset: resets the actual value to 0.

The counter contains• 3 inputs (input +, input – and reset)• a counter function• 1 output.

In total there are:– 2 counters 1 to 2 for BU1– 4 counters 1 to 4 for BU2

Schematic

Figure 9-8: Schematic counter

Notes

Please observe the following notes: • The time between the events to be counted depends on– the input delay– the device cycle time (see chapter “Technical data”).• The actual value remains the same

– during parameterization or failure of supply voltage– if there is a simultaneous input signal at input + and input -.

Notice:

When a reset is pending, the output is always 0.

Counter 1Input +

Input –

Reset

OutputCounter 2

Input +

Input –

Reset

Output

Limit Limit

Counter 3Input +

Input –

Reset

OutputCounter 4

Input +

Input –

Reset

Output

Limit Limit

SIMOCODE pro

9-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

Settings

Counter 1 to 4 - Description

Input + Increases the actual value by 1Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Input – Decreases the actual value by 1.Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the counter to 0 (count value and output)Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Limit The maximum value that can be reached when counting and where the counter provides an output signal. Range: 0 to 65535

Table 9-4: Counter settings


Logic Modules

9.6 Timer

Description of function

The timer contains• 2 inputs (input and reset)• 1 output.

If there is an input signal, the timer can provide an output signal with the output response– with closing delay– with closing delay with memory– with off delay– with fleeting closing.In total there are:– 2 timers 1 to 2 for BU1– 4 timers 1 to 4 for BU2– timer current value.

Schematic

Figure 9-9: Schematic of timer

Note

The output is always 0 following a reset.

Timer 1Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

Timer 2Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

Timer 3Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

Timer 4Input

Reset

Output

Value

Type

SIMOCODE pro

9-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

Output response

Figure 9-10: Output response of the timer

With closing delay:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

Closing delay with memory:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

With OFF delay:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

With fleeting closing:

Input

Reset

Time

Output

t t

t

t t

t


Logic Modules

Settings

Timer 1 to 4 - Description

Input Activation by any signal(any sockets ,e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the timer to 0.Activation by any signal(any sockets ,e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Various output responsesRange: with closing delay, closing delay with memory, with OFF delay, with fleeting closing

Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activa-ted, depending on the output response (type). Range: 0 to 65535, unit 100 ms

Table 9-5: Timer settings

SIMOCODE pro

9-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

9.7 Signal conditioner

Description

If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal with the output response– not inverting– inverting– edge rising with memory– edge falling with memoryYou can select the type of output response. The signal conditioner contains• 2 inputs (input and reset)• a logic• 1 output.In total there are:– 2 signal conditioners for BU1 (signal conditioner 1 to 2)– 4 signal conditioners for BU2 (signal conditioner 1 to 4).

Schematic

Figure 9-11: Schematic of the signal conditioner

Note


Signal conditioner 1Input

Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Logic Modules

Types of signals/output responses

Figure 9-12: Types of signals/output response of the signal conditioners

Level inverting

Edge rising with memory

Edge falling with memory

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Level not inverting

Input

Output

Reset

SIMOCODE pro

9-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

NOR function

You can implement a NOR function with the signal type “Level inverted”:

Table 9-6: NOR function

Settings

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1

1 0 0

0 1 0

1 1 0

Signal conditioner

1 to 4 -

Description

Input Activation by any signal(any sockets ,e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.Activation by any signal(any sockets ,e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Different output responsesRange: Level not inverted, level inverted without memory, edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory

Table 9-7: Signal condition settings

Input

ResetOutput

>= 1


Logic Modules

9.8 Non-volatile elements

Description

Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioners. The output signals remain after failure of the supply voltage.If there is an input signal, the signal conditioner can provide an output signal with the output response– not inverting– inverting– edge rising with memory– edge falling with memoryYou can set the output response.The non-volatile element contains• 2 inputs (input and reset)• a logic• 1 output.

In total there are:– 2 non-volatile elements1 to 2 for BU1– 4 non-volatile elements1 to 4 for BU2

Schematic

Figure 9-13: Schematic for non-volatile elements

Note


Non-volat. elem. 1Input

Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type


Reset

Output

Type

SIMOCODE pro

9-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

Types of signals/output responses

Figure 9-14: Signal types/output responses of non-volatile elements

Level inverted

Edge rising with memory

Edge falling with memory

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Output

Reset

Input

Ausgang

Reset

Level not inverted

Input

Output

Reset

Voltage failure

Voltage failure


Logic Modules

NOR function

You can implement a NOR function with the “level inverted” type of signal:

Table 9-8: NOR function

Settings

Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1

1 0 0

0 1 0

1 1 0

Non-volatile

elements

1 to 4 -

Description

Input Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Reset Resets the signal conditioner to 0.Activation by any signal(any sockets e.g. device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)

Type Different output responsesRange: Level not inverted, level inverted without memory, edge rising with memory, edge falling with memory

Table 9-9: Non-volatile elements settings

Input

ResetOutput

>= 1

SIMOCODE pro

9-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

9.9 Flashing

Description

With the “flashing” function blocks, you can e.g. assign the “flashing” function to the operator panel LEDs (for example).The “flashing” function block provides an output signal with a frequency of 2 Hz if there is an input signal. The function block contains• 1 input• flashing frequency• 1 output.

In total there are:– 3 flash function blocks, 1 to 3, for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

Figure 9-15: Schematic for flashing

Settings

Flashing 1 to 3 - Description

Input Activation by any signal(any sockets ,e.g. device inputs, signals, status, etc.)

Table 9-10: Flashing settings

Flashing 1

Input OutputFlashing 2

Input Output

Flashing 3

Input Output


Logic Modules

9.10 Flickering

Description

With the “flickering” function blocks, you can e.g. assign the “flickering” function to the operator panel LEDs (for example).The “flickering” function block provides an output signal with a frequency of 4 Hz if there is an input signal.The function block contains• 1 input • flickering frequency• 1 output.

In total there are:– 3 flickering functions, 1 to 3, for BU1 and BU2.

Schematic

Figure 9-16: Schematic for flickering

Settings

Flickering 1 to 3 - Description

Input Activation by any signal(any sockets ,e.g. signals, etc.)

Table 9-11: Flickering settings

Flickering 1

Input OutputFlickering 2

Input Output

Flickering 3

Input Output

SIMOCODE pro

9-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

9.11 Limit monitor

Description

Any analog signals (length: 2 bytes) can be monitored for limit overshooting or undershooting. The limit monitor provides a “Signal - limit” output signal.Example: Monitoring the mains voltage for overvoltage.The limit monitor contains• 1 analog input • a logic component• 1 output.

In total there are:– 4 limit monitors 1 to 4 for BU2

Schematic

Figure 9-17: Schematic of limit monitor

Response

Table 9-12: Response of the limits

See also “Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro” in chapter "Important Notes".

Response Limit 1 to 4

Switch off -

Warn -

Signal X (d)

Disabled -

Delay 0 to 25.5 s

Limit monitor 1

Signal -Type

Limit

Effectiveness

(Labeling)

Limit value 1Input (analog)

Limit monitor 2

Signal -Type

Limit

Effectiveness


Limit monitor 3

Signal - Type

Limit

Effectiveness


Limit monitor 4

Signal -Type

Limit

Effectiveness


Response

(Labeling)

Response

(Labeling)

Response

(Labeling)

Response


Logic Modules

Settings

Functional principle

The limit signal issued depends on • the operating state of the motor• the TPF function• the parmeterized “effectiveness”:

– on– on+– run– run+.

Limit monitor - Description

Input

(analog, 2 bytes)

Activation of the word via any analog signals(any sockets ,e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling time, actual value of timers, etc.)

Type Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting or undershooting.

Effectiveness Determines in what motor operating state the limit monitor is to be analyzed: • on, i.e. always analyze, independent of whether the motor is run-

ning or not (default)• on+, i.e. always analyze, independent of whether the motor is

running or notException: 'TPF', i.e. motor feeder is in test position.

• run, i.e., analyze only if the motor is in the ON state (TPF)• run+, i.e. analyze only if the motor is running and the start-up pro-

cedure is finished (i.e. the “Start active” message is not applied) and there is no test position (TPF); Example: Monitoring the power factor

Limit Operating value of monitoring. The return value is always determi-ned by the “Limit monitor - delay” parameter.Range: 0 to 65535.

Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly exceeded before the “Signal - limit” output is set. Range: 0 to 25.5 seconds.

Table 9-13: Limit monitor settings

SIMOCODE pro

9-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Logic Modules

The following display shows a flow chart with the different “effectiveness” parameters.

Figure 9-18: Functional principle of the limit monitor

Off Start Motor is running Off

“On”

“On+”

“Run”

“Run+”

Class-time

Not with TPF

Not with TPF

Not with TPF


Logic Modules

SIMOCODE pro

9-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Communication 10In this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the possibilities of SIMO-CODE pro communication, e.g. with a PLC. The presetting of the control, signaling and diagnostic data is sufficient for almost all applications so that the parameterization only has to be changed a little. Otherwise, you can adapt the settings of the individual bits specifically for your application.

Target groups


Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• the principle of connecting plugs to sockets• knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.


You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:Device parameters > Bus parameters

Further function blocks > Outputs >Acyclic signaling data

Further function blocks >Outputs >Cyclic signaling data


Communication

10.1 Introduction

10.1.1 Definitions

PROFIBUS DP

PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol. DP stands for decentralized periphery. The main task of PROFIBUS DP is fast cyclic data exchange bet-ween the central DP master and the periphery devices.

PROFIBUS DPV1

PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. With this, acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic, control and test data is also possible.

DP master

A master is designated as a DP master if it works with the DP protocol according to the EN 50 170 norm, volume 2, PROFIBUS.

Class 1 master

A class 1 master is an active station on the PROFIBUS DP. Characteristic is the cyclic data exchange with other stations. Typical class 1 masters are, for example, PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.

Class 2 master

A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP. Typical class 2 masters are, for example, • PC/programing devices with the SIMOCODE-ES professional software• SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)• PC with SIMARIS manager software (power management).

DPV1 slave

A slave is designated as a DPV1 slave if it is operated on the PROFIBUS bus with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works according to the EN 50 170 norm, volume 2, PROFIBUS.

GSD (device data)

Device data (GSD) contains DP slave descriptions in a standard format. Using GSD (device data) makes it easier to parameterize the DP slave in a DP master system.

OM SIMOCODE pro

OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD (device data) to integrate SIMOCODE pro into STEP 7.OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES Professional (if it is installed) for parameterizing within STEP7.

SIMOCODE pro

10-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Communication

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into Step7 and has the following characteristics. It is connected via OM SIMOCODE pro instead of GSD (device data). It supports the S7 model (diagnostic alarms, process alarms)

Writing data

Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.

Reading data

Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro system.


Communication

10.2 Transmitting data

Options for data transfer

The following figure shows the options for data transfer:

Figure 10-1: Options for data transfer

Communication principle

The following figure shows the communication principle where, depending on the master and slave modes of operation, different data is transmitted:

Figure 10-2: Communication principle

Class 2 master

PC or programming device with SIMOCODE ES Profes-sional

Class 1 master

SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communication processor

PROFIBUS DPV1 norm extension: parameterizing, diagnostics, controlling, signaling, testing via PROFIBUS DPV1

PC/programming device e.g. with SIMOCODE ES SmartParameterizing, diagnostics, controlling, signaling, testing via system interface

Data transfer to class 1 master, depending on the slave mode of operation: (table below, “slave modes of operation”)

Maximum of two class 2 masterspossible

PLC

3UF7

PLC-CPU

Communication processor

Cycl. signaling data Cycl. control data

Configuration

Cyclic I/O Acyclic

GSD

Parameters

Start-upparameterblock

Acyclic

DPV1

Class 1 master

Acyclic

PC or DCSe.g. SIMOCODE ESProfessional

Class 2 master (max. 2)

SIMOCODE pro

Diagnostics Alarms

DPV0

DPV1

Data records Data records

PLC-CPU

Communication processor

Cycl. signaling data Cycl. control data

Configuration

Cyclic I/O Acyclic

GSD

ParametersParameters

Start-upparameterblock

Acyclic

DPV1

Class 1 master

Acyclic

PC or DCSe.g. SIMOCODE ESProfessional

Class 2 master (max. 2)

SIMOCODE pro

Diagnostics Alarms

DPV0

DiagnosticsDiagnostics AlarmsAlarms

DPV0

DPV1

Data recordsData recordsData records Data recordsData recordsData records

SIMOCODE pro

10-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Communication

Slave modes of operation

The following table shows an overview of the slave modes of operation which SIMOCODE pro can be operated with on the class 1 master:

Figure 10-3: Slave modes of operation of SIMOCODE pro

Preparing the data transfer

SIMOCODE pro must be connected to a DP master system for data trans-fer.For this, you must configure in two places:• You must decide on one of the options in the above-mentioned table

(GSD (device data) or OM)• You must prepare SIMOCODE pro e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. There you can

set the following parameters in the dialog Device parameters > Bus para-

meters:– DP address– diagnostics– start-up parameter block

SIMOCODE pro

connected as:

Class 1 master Class 1 master S7 master

DP master

manufacturer-

independent,

without DPV1 alarms

DP master

manufacturer-

independent,

with DPV1 alarms

DPV1 slave

via GSD (device

data)

• Cyclical data transfer• Norm diagnostics• Status messages• Parameterization star-

ting (only BU1)• Acyclic writing and rea-

ding of DPV1 data records (if supported by the master)

• Cyclic data transfer• Norm diagnostics• Status messages• Process and diagnostic

alarm• Parameterization star-


ding of DPV1 data records

• Cyclic data transfer• Norm diagnostics• Status messages• Process and diagnostic




S7 slave

via OM

SIMOCODE ES

— —

• Cyclic data transfer• Norm diagnostics• Process and diagnostic


ting• Acyclic writing and rea-



Communication

10.3 Configuring SIMOCODE pro

10.3.1 Configuring with a GSD file

Definition of GSD

Device data (GSD) contain DP slave descriptions in a standard format. Using GSD (device data) makes it easier to configure the DP master and the DP slave.

Connecting SIMOCODE pro as a norm slave with a GSD file

You configure SIMOCODE pro via the GSD file. SIMOCODE pro is connec-ted as a standard slave in your system via the GSD file. You can download the GSD file• from the Internet under

http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_d/gsd (under Schaltgeräte i.e. switchgear).• via a modem under the telephone number +49 (0)911 737972.

The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C:• SI0180FD.GSG (German)• SI0180FD.GSE (English)

The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V:• SI1180FD.GSG (German)• SI1180FD.GSE (English)

Attention

If you want to use the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro(e.g. timestamping), your configuration tool must support GSD files - rev.5, like e.g. STEP7 V5.3 and higher.

SIMOCODE pro

10-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

http://www4.ad.siemens.de/WW/view/de/10805317/133100

Communication

Integrating the GSD file into the configuration software

The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file into SIMATIC S7:

Table 10-1: Integrating the GSD file into the configuration software

Parameterizing via GSD

Attention

Parameterization via GSD is only designed for SIMOCODE pro C.The GSD for SIMOCODE pro V does not contain any device parameters.

Step STEP 7, from V5.1 + SP2

1 Start STEP 7 and call the menu command Extras > Install new GSD file in the HW configuration.

2 In the following dialog, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with OK.Result:The field device is displayed in the hardware catalog in the PROFIBUS DP directory.

Insert from the SIMOCODE pro hardware catalog under Further field devices >Switchgear > SIMOCODE pro >

SIMOCODE pro V (GSD) (device data) orSIMOCODE pro C (GSD) (device data) on the PROFIBUS.

3 Configure SIMOCODE pro with STEP 7 (see integrated help in STEP 7).


Communication

10.3.2 Configuring with the SIMOCODE ES software

You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMOCODE ES software.There are several options available for this:• SIMOCODE ES Smart, for parameterizing via system interface.

Order number: 3ZS1 312-1CC10-0YA0• SIMOCODE ES Professional, for parameterizing via the DPV1 interface and

system interface. This version contains the object manager (OM) SIMOCODE pro. This enables the connection of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave in STEP7 and the integration in STEP7.Order number: 3ZS1 312-2CC10-0YA0.There you will find SIMOCODE pro under Switchgear > SIMOCODE pro.

10.3.3 Configuring with SIMATIC PDM

You can also configure SIMOCODE pro via the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) software.There are several options available for this:• SIMATIC PDM as a stand-alone program

Prerequisite: Programming device/PC with PROFIBUS DP interface which is supported by SIMATIC PDM. SIMOCODE pro is parameterized via PROFIBUS DP.

• SIMATIC PDM integrated into STEP7Prerequisite for data record routing: SIMATIC S7-400 with PROFIBUS DP interface connection which supports the whole data record routing for the parameterization of field devices(CP443-5 Extended) or with IE/PB link.

Note

Note that the parameter block must be set so that the parameters will not be overwritten by the start-up parameterization!

SIMOCODE pro

10-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Communication

10.4 Telegram description

Cyclic data

The cyclic data is exchanged once every DP cycle between the PROFIBUS DP master and DP slave. The PROFIBUS DP master module then sends the control data to SIMOCODE pro. As a response, SIMOCODE pro sends the signaling data to the master module.By parameterizing SIMOCODE pro, you can select between two basic types which determine the contents of the cyclic data:• Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:

• Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:

Diagnostic data/alarms

The diagnostic data contains important information about the status of SIMOCODE pro. This simplifies troubleshooting.In contrast to the cyclic data, the diagnostic data is only transmitted to the master module if it changes.PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:• Norm diagnostics• Status messages• Process and diagnostic alarms according to DPV1.

You will find the detailed description in the appendix.

Specification Length Specification Info

Basic type 1(available from the middle of 2005)

4 bytes control data Cyclic controlling - bit 0.0 to 1.7 BU2

Cyclic controlling - ana-log value

Basic type 2 2 bytes control data Cyclic controlling - bit 0.0 to 1.7

BU1 BU2


Basic type 1(available from the middle of 2005)

10 bytesSignaling data

Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 to 1.7 BU2

Cyclic signaling - analog input 1 to 4

Basic type 2 4 bytes signaling data

Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 to 1.7 BU1

BU2

Cyclic signaling - analog input 1


Communication

Starting up parameter data

For every start-up of SIMOCODE pro on PROFIBUS DP, parameters are transmitted to the device.Depending on the master module used, norm parameters or norm parame-ters + SIMOCODE pro parameters are transmitted.

Notice:

If the effective device parameters of SIMOCODE pro are overwritten by the start-up parameters, start-up parameter block = no must be set. For start-up parameter block = yes, the start-up parameters are discarded and the effec-tive SIMOCODE pro parameters remain active.

• The start-up parameters are set with• the configuration tool when the GSD file is loaded (only BU1)• with OM SIMOCODE ES Professional (when connected as an S7 slave).

Acyclic writing and reading of data records

You can use these functions according to DPV1 if the DP master supports this. Part of these are the acyclic DPV1 services for reading and writing data records. With this, operator control, process monitoring and parameteriza-tion is possible during runtime.

10.5 Process image (cyclic data) and data records (acyclic

data)

Process image

The process image is part of the system memory of the DP master. At the start of the cyclic program, the signal states of the inputs are transmitted to the process image of the inputs. At the end of the cyclic program, the pro-cess image of the outputs is transferred as a signal state to the DP slave.

Data records

Data records contain additional information which can only be read/partly written. Data record 67 contains the information about the process image of the outputs. Data record 69 contains the information about the process image of the inputs. Both these data records can only be read.You will find further information on the data records in chapter "Data For-mats and Data Records" starting from page B-1.

SIMOCODE pro

10-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Communication

10.6 Diagnostics with STEP 7

10.6.1 Reading out the diagnostics

Length of the diagnostic telegram

• The telegram has a maximum length of 62 bytes.

Options for reading out the diagnostics

Table 10-2: Reading out the diagnostics with STEP 7

Example for reading out the S7 diagnostics with SFC 13 “DP NRM_DG”

Here you will find an example of how to read out the slave diagnostics for a DP slave in the STEP 7 user program with the SFC 13.

Assumptions

The following assumptions apply for this STEP 7 user program:

• The diagnostic address is 1022 (3FEH).

• The slave diagnostics should be stored in DB82: From the address 0.0, length 62 bytes.

• The slave diagnostics consist of 62 bytes.

STEP 7 user program

Automation system

with DP master

Block or register

in STEP 7

Application See...

SIMATIC S7/M7 SFC 13“DP NRM_DG”

Reading out slave diagnostics(store in the data region of the user program)

chapter "Configuring the slave diagnostics" on page 10-12; SFC see online help in STEP 7

STL (statement list) Explanation

CALL SFC 13

REQ :=TRUE

LADDR :=W#16#3FE

RET_VAL :=MW0

RECORD :=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 62

BUSY :=M2.0

read request

diagnostic address

RET_VAL from SFC 13

data compartment for diagnostics in the DB82

read process runs over several OB1 cycles


Communication

10.6.2 Configuring the slave diagnostics

Configuring the slave diagnostics

Figure 10-4: Configuring the slave diagnostics

Attention

The length of the diagnostic telegram varies between 28 and 62 bytes.You will find the length of the last diagnostic telegram received in• STEP 7 from the RET_VAL parameter of the SFC 13.

...

...

Station status 1 to 3

Master PROFIBUS address

High byteLow byte

Manufacturer's

Identification-related diagnostics

Status message

Channel-related diagnostics(3 bytes per entry)

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 4

Byte 5

Byte 6

Byte 9

Byte 28

Byte 29

Byte 30

Byte 31

up to max.

Byte 34

Det

ails

Byte 7

Byte 8

up to max.

Byte 62

Byte 35

Alarms...OB40OB82

...

...

identification

SIMOCODE pro

10-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Communication

10.6.3 Station status 1 to 3

Definition

Station status 1 to 3 gives an overview of the state of a DP slave.

Station status 1

Table 10-3: Configuring the station status 1 (byte 0)

Bit Meaning Cause/corrective measures

0 1:The DP slave cannot be addressed by the DP master.

• Is the correct PROFIBUS address set on the DP slave?

• Is the bus connection plug connected?• Voltage on the DP slave?• RS-485 repeater configured correctly?• Reset implemented on the DP slave?

1 1:The DP slave is not yet ready for the data transfer.

• Wait, as the DP slave is just starting-up.

2 1:The configuration data sent from the DP master to the DP slave does not corre-spond to the configuration of the DP slave.

• Correct station type or correct configuration of the DP slave in the configuration software?

3 1:There are external diagnostics present (general diagnostic display)

• Evaluate the identification-related diagnostics, the status messages and/or the channel-related diagnostics. As soon as all errors are rectified, bit 3 is reset. The bit is reset if there is a new diagnostic message in the bytes of the above-mentioned diagnostics.

4 1:The function required is not supported by the DP slave (e.g. changing the PRO-FIBUS address via software).

• Check the configuration.

5 1:DP master cannot interpret the response of the DP slave.

• Check the bus configuration.

6 1:The DP slave type does not correspond to the software configuration.

• Is the correct station type entered in the confi-guration software?

7 1:The DP slave has been parameterized by another DP master (not by the DP master which has access to the DP slave at the moment).

• Bit is always 1 when you are e.g. accessing the DP slave from the programming device or from another DP master.The PROFIBUS address of the DP master which parameterized the DP slave is in the “Master PROFIBUS address” diagnostic byte.


Communication

Station status 2

Table 10-4: Configuring station status 2 (byte 1)

Station status 3

Table 10-5: Configuring station status 3 (byte 2)

Bit Meaning

0 1:The DP slave must be parameterized anew.

1 1:There is a diagnostic message. The DP slave does not work until the error is rectified (static diagnostic message).

2 1:The bit is always “1” when the slave is present with this PROFIBUS address.

3 1:The address monitoring is activated for this slave.

4 1:The DP slave received the “FREEZE” control command1).

5 1:The DP slave received the “SYNC” control command1).

6 0: Bit is always “0”.

7 1:The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current processing.

1) Bit is only updated if another diagnostic message is changed.

Bit Meaning

0 to 6 0: Bits are always “0”.

7 1: • There are more diagnostic messages than the DP slave can save.• The DP master cannot enter all diagnostic messages sent from the

DP slave into its diagnostic buffer (channel-related diagnostics).

SIMOCODE pro

10-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Communication

10.6.4 Master PROFIBUS address

Definition

The PROFIBUS address of the DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the Master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte:

• which the DP slave parameterized and

• which has read and write access to the DP slave.

The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 4 of the slave diagnostics.

10.6.5 Manufacturer's identification

Definition

There is a code stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the DP slave type.

Manufacturer's identification

Table 10-6: Configuration of the manufacturer's identification

Byte 5 Byte 6 Manufacturer's identification for

80H FDH SIMOCODE pro


Communication

10.6.6 Identification-related diagnostics

Definition

The identification-related diagnostics begins at byte 7 and is 2 bytes long.

Identification-related diagnostics

The identification-related diagnostics is configured as follows:

Figure 10-5: Configuration of the identification-related diagnostics

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 07 6 5 0

Byte 7

Bit number:

= 0x42

Length of the identification-related diagnosticsincluding byte 6 (= 2 bytes)

Code for identification-related diagnostics

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x7 6 5 0

Byte 8

Bit number

0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available

1: Identification-related diagnostics are available

0 0 0 0 00 0x7 6 5 0

Byte 8

Bit number

0: Identification-related diagnostics are not available

1: Identification-related diagnostics are available

GSD (device data)

OM SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro

10-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Communication

10.6.7 Status messages

Definition

The status messages yield the detailed status of SIMOCODE.

Status messages configuration

The status messages are configured as follows:

Figure 10-6: Status messages configuration

You will find the detailed messages in the section "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics" in chapter "Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis" on page A-13.

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 07 6 5 0

Byte 9

Bit number

= 0x14

Length of the status messageincluding byte 9 (= 20 bytes)

7 6 5Byte 13

Bit number

7 0Byte 10 0x81

7 0Byte 11 x

Byte 12 0x00

4 3 2 1 0

Slot number

Status message

GSD:OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04

0x01

Detailed status...

Byte 28


Communication

10.6.8 Channel-related diagnostics

Definition

Channel-related diagnostics give information about device errors from SIMOCODE pro and represent a more detailed version of the identification-related diagnostics.

Channel-related diagnostics

The channel-related diagnostics are configured as follows:

Figure 10-7: Configuring the channel-related diagnostics

Error types

The diagnostic message is signaled on channel 0.

Table 10-7: Error types

Error

numb

er

Error type Meaning/cause

F9 01001: Error

• Internal error/device error• Error on self-test• Switchgear defective

Exact information indata record 92

F16 10000: Parameterization error

• Incorrect parameter value

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 07 6 5 0

Byte 29

Bit number

Code for channel-related diagnostics

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 07 6 5 0

Byte 30

Bit number

Input/output channel

7 6 5 0Byte 31

Bit number

Channel type:

Error type 9 or 16 (table below)

000B: No special channel type

Byte 32 to Next channel-related diagnostics message(Allocation as for byte 29 to 31)Byte 34

0 0 0

0x80 GSD0x83 OM SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro

10-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Communication

10.6.9 Alarms

Diagnostic alarm

Device errors or parameter errors are alarm sources for diagnostic alarms.As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic alarm, the OB 82 diagnostic alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7.

Process alarm

Process messages, warnings and errors are alarm sources for process alarms. Configuring the process alarms is the same as for the status messa-ges. As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a process alarm, the OB 40 process alarm is started in the SIMATIC-S7.

Process alarm configuration

Figure 10-8: Configuring alarm configuration

You will find the detailed messages in the section "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics" in chapter "Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis" on page A-13.

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 07 6 5 0 Bit number

= 0x14

Length of the process alarmincluding header byte (= 20 bytes)

7 6 5 Bit number

7 00x02

7 0x

0x00

4 3 2 1 0

Slot number

Process alarm

GSD:OM SIMOCODE pro: 0x04

0x01

Detailed status...


Communication

10.6.10 Data records - overview

Table 10-8: Data records - overview

Data record

number

Description Read/write

67 Process image of the outputs Read

69 Process image of the inputs Read

92 Device diagnostics Read

94 Measured values Read

95 Display and statistics data Read/write

130 Basic device parameter 1 Read/write

131 Basic device parameter 2 Read/write

132 Extended device parameter 1 Read/write

133 Extended device parameter 2 Read/write

139 Labeling Read/write

160 Communication parameters Read/write

165 Comment Read/write

202 Free acyclic control data Read/write

203 Free acyclic signaling data Read

224 Password protection Write

SIMOCODE pro

10-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces 11In this chapter

This chapter contains information about how the individual SIMOCODE pro components are mounted and wired.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• mechanics• electricians• maintenance and service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.


Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces

11.1 General information about mounting and wiring

Notes

Warning

Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock and burns. Discon-nect the device from the system before beginning work.

Attention

Follow the information contained in the operating manual.

Fixing lugs for screw attachments

Attention

For technical reasons, there are two sorts of mounting lugs for screw attach-ments:For basic units and expansion modules: Order no. 3RP1903For current measurement modules,45 mm and 55 mm width: Order no. 3RP1900-0B

Detachable terminals

Attention

The detachable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular position!

SIMOCODE pro

11-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


11.2 Mounting

11.2.1 Mounting the basic units and expansion modules

You can attach these system components in the following manner:• Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail without requiring

tools• Snap-on mounting of the basic units onto 45 mm and 55 mm wide current

measurement modules (up to 100 A) with an integrated standard mounting rail, without requiring tools

• Screw attachment with mounting lugs (order no: 3RP1903) and screws on a level surface.These mounting lugs are only suitable for basic units and expansion modules!

Figure 11-1: Mounting the basic units

SIMOCODE pro C SIMOCODE pro Vwith increased mounting depth

Snap-on mounting onto standard mounting rails

Screw attachment

3RP1903

Ø 5 mm

Expansion module

Ø 5 mm

3RP1903

Snap-on mounting onto the current measurement modulee.g. 45 mm wide current measurement module with BU1

Standard

BU1 BU2

mountingrails



11.2.2 Mounting the current measurement modules

You can attach these system components in the following manner:• Current measurement module up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting

or screw attachment with mounting lugs (order no: 3RP1903-0B) and screws on a level surface. These mounting lugs are only suitable for the current mea-surement modules! For the current measurement modules up to 25 A you also require an additional 25 mm long spacer.

• Current measurement module up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or screw attachment.

• Current measurement modules up to 630 A screw attachment.

Figure 11-2: Mounting the current measurement modules

3RP1900-0B

3UF7100-1AA00-0

3UF7101-1AA00-0

25 mm spacer3RP1900-0B

Snap-on mounting

3UF7102-1AA00-0

Screw attachment

45 mm wide 55 mm wide

3UF7103-1AA00-0 3UF7103-1BA00-0 3UF7104-1BA00-0

0.3 A up to 3 A2.4 A up to 25 A 10 A up to 100 A

10 A up to 100 A 20 A up to 200 A 63 A up to 630 Ascrew attachmentSnap-on mounting or

screw attachmentSnap-on mounting orscrew attachment

SIMOCODE pro

11-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


11.2.3 Mounting the operator panel

The operator panel is designed to be installed in the front panel of motor control centers or in cabinet doors (for example). Carry out the following steps:

Table 11-1: Sequence for mounting an operator panel

Figure 11-3: Mounting the operator panel

Step Description

1 Create a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or cabinet door (see diagram for dimensions).

2 Place the operator panel in the cutout.

3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.

4 Lock the operator panel in position by tightly screwing the four screws of the mounting bracket.

4x

90+0.5

30+

0.5

Front panel

Cutout

Switching cabinetetc.

Operator panel Mounting bracket

door



11.3 Wiring

11.3.1 Detachable terminals for basic units and expansion modules

Basic units and expansion modules have detachable terminals. You do not have to detach the wiring to interchange the components!

Figure 11-4: Detachable terminals

Attention

The detachable terminals are mechanically coded and only fit in a particular position!

Cables

The cable cross-section is the same for all devices. The following table shows the cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables for the detachable terminals:

Table 11-2: Cable cross-sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the cables

Detachable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque

0.8 to 1.2 Nm7 to 10.3 LB.IN

Strip length Cable cross-section

1 x (0.5 to 4.0) mm²2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm²

1 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm²2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm²

AWG AWG 2 x 20 to 14

Detachable terminalsBasic units Expansion modules

A

D

C

A, C, D: coded

A

C

D

M3.5

10 Solid

10 Stranded, with/withoutend sleeves

SIMOCODE pro

11-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Basic unit pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment of the detachable terminals:

Table 11-3: Detachable terminals pin assignment

Sequence for wiring the detachable terminals of basic units


Table 11-4: Wiring the detachable terminals of basic units

Pin Assignment

Upper terminals

1 Relay output 1 and 2

2 Relay output OUT1

3 Relay output OUT2

4 Digital input IN3

5 Digital input IN4

T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)

6 Relay output OUT3

7 Relay output OUT4

8 Internal 24 V DC

9 Digital input IN1

10 Digital input IN2

T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)

Lower terminals

A1 Pin 1 supply voltage

A2 Pin 2 supply voltage

A PROFIBUS DP Pin A

B PROFIBUS DP Pin B

SPE/PE Shielded/PE

Step Description

1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.

2 If you want to use terminals A/B for PROFIBUS DP, place the PROFIBUS DP cable-shielding on the SPE/PE terminal.Attention! The A/B terminals are an alternative to the 9-pole SUB-D con-

nection! Baud rates up to 1.5 MBit/s are possible!

3 Connect the system shielding to the SPE/PE terminal.

1 OUT1 2 .2 3 4 IN3 IN45 T2

OUT3 7 8 9IN1 IN210 T16

DEVICE

BUS

GEN. FAULT

ϑ

TEST/RESET

PRO

FIBU

S D

P

A1 A2 A B SPE/PE

24 V

SIMOCODE pro



Digital module pin assignment

The following table shows the pin assignment of the detachable terminals:

Table 11-5: Detachable terminals pin assignment

Sequence for wiring the detachable terminals


Table 11-6: Wiring the detachable terminals of digital modules

Pin Assignment

Upper terminals

20 Relay output 1 and 2

21 Relay output OUT1

22 Relay output OUT2



25 —

Lower terminals



PE Shielding

Step Description

1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.

2 Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.

20 21 22OUT1 .2

23 24 25IN2

READY

26 27 PEIN3 IN4

IN1

SIMOCODE pro

11-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


11.3.2 Current measurement with current measurement modules

The size of the motor current determines the size of the corresponding cur-rent measurement module that should be chosen for current measurement:• Push-through system up to 200 A. The 3 phases pass through the push-

through openings.• Rail connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to Sie-

mens contactors.

The following table shows the various current measurement modules with the corresponding current measurement ranges:

Current measurement module Current

measurement

3UF7100-1AA00-00.3 A up to 3 AØ Push-through openings: 7.5 mm

Push-through system

3UF7101-1AA00-02.4 A up to 25 AØ Push-through openings: 7.5 mm

3UF7102-1AA00-010 A up to 100 AØ Push-through openings: 14 mm

3UF7103-1AA00-020 A up to 200 AØ Push-through openings: 25 mm

3UF7103-1BA00-020 A up to 200 APin cross-section: 16 to 95 mm², AWG 6 to 3/0

Rail connection system

3UF7104-1BA00-063 A up to 630 APin cross-section:50 to 240 mm², AWG 1/0 to 500 kcmil

Table 11-7: Current measurement module with the corresponding current measurement range

Ø



11.4 System interfaces

11.4.1 General

Please observe the following notes:• SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the

system interfaces.• There are 4 lengths of connecting cable that can be used to join the system

components.• The system is always expanded from the basic unit. Basic units have 2

system interfaces:– Bottom: For outgoing connection cables from BU1 to the current mea-

surement module.– Front: For outgoing connecting cables to an expansion module or opera-

tor panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.• Current measurement modules have one system interface:

– Bottom or front incoming connecting cable from basic unit.• Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front.

– Left: For incoming connecting cable from previous expansion module or basic unit BU2.

– Right: For outgoing connecting cables to an expansion module or opera-tor panel and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.

• The operator panel has 2 system interfaces:– Front: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from previous expansion

module or basic unit.• System interfaces that are not used are closed using the covering.

SIMOCODE pro

11-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Example

The following figure shows the configuration with SIMOCODE pro V:

Figure 11-5: Example of system interfaces

Outgoing, to• Expansion module• Operator panel

UF-

0113

0

SIMOCODE pro V Basic unit (BU2)Current measurementmodule (IM)

Operator panel (OP)

Expansion module

Expansion modules

Incoming, from• Expansion module• Basic unit BU2

Outgoing, to• Expansion module• Operator panel

Incoming, from• Basic unit

UF-

0113

0

Operator panel (OP)Incoming, from• Previous expansion module• Basic unit

Covering

Basic units

Outgoing, to• Current measurement module

Current measurement

Module (IM)



11.4.2 Basic units, expansion modules and current measurement modules

The system interfaces are located on the front and bottom of the basic units. Other system components can be• joined to them using a connecting cable, e.g. digital module, current measu-

rement module• directly plugged into them, e.g. addressing plugs and memory modules.

System interfaces that are not used are closed using the system-interface covering.

Attention

Only connect system interfaces when there is no voltage applied!

Figure 11-6: Connecting system components to the system interface

Connecting cable

Expansion modulesBasic units Current measurement modules

2 systeminterfaces

Systeminterfaces

Systeminterface

Systeminterface

Connecting cable

Memory module,covering,addressing plug

SIMOCODE pro

11-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Sequence for connecting the system interface


Table 11-8: Connecting the system interfaces

Figure 11-7: Method for connecting the system interfaces

Notes

Attention

For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interfaces on the bottom can only be used for the current measurement module!

Attention

Follow the color-coding on the connecting cable (see Figure)!

Step Description

1 Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the cat-ches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place. For SIMOCODE pro C, the system interface on the bottom can only be

used for the current measurement module!

2 Use the covering to close system interfaces that are not in use

ConnectingcableCovering

System interfaces on the

1

2

3

front side and the bottom

Example: SIMOCODE pro C

Catches

Catches

Color-coded



11.4.3 Operator panel

The operator panel has two system interfaces:• system interface on the rear. This is not normally accessible when an integra-

ted operator panel is used since the connecting cable from the basic unit or expansion module is attached to it.

• system interface on the front. This is normally accessible when an integrated operator panel is used. Components are connected directly when required and then removed again afterwards.These could include:

– Memory modules– Addressing plugs– PC cable to connect a PC / programming device– Covering (if a system interface is not being used).

Figure 11-8: Connecting system components to the operator panel

Rear system interface Front system interface

e.g.Memory moduleConnecting cable

SIMOCODE pro

11-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Sequence for connecting the system interfaces


Table 11-9: Connecting the system interface

Figure 11-9: Method for connecting the system interfaces

Notes

Attention

Follow the color-coding on the connecting cable (see figure)!

Step Description

1 Place the plug in the plug shaft as straightly as possible. Ensure that the cat-ches on the plug shaft above the plug housing audibly click into place.The incoming connecting cable is connected to the rear side.

2 Use the covering to close system interfaces that are not in use.

Rear system interface

Connecting cable

Front system interface

Connecting

2

1

1

Catches

Catches

Color-coded



11.4.4 PROFIBUS DP on a 9-pole SUB-D socket

The PROFIBUS DP can only be connected to the basic unit.

Attention

The 9-pole SUB-D connection is an alternative to terminals A/B!

Sequence for PROFIBUS DP connection


Table 11-10: Wiring the detachable terminals of digital modules

Figure 11-10: Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-pole SUB-D socket

Step Description

1 Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the PROFIBUS DP interface.

Example: SIMOCODE pro C

PROFIBUS DP cable

PROFIBUS DP interface

9-poleSUB-D plug

9-pole SUB-D socket

SIMOCODE pro

11-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


11.5 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP

Specification

The key data included in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and cables.

Profibus user organization (PUO) installation guidelines

For electrical PROFIBUS networks, please also follow the PROFIBUS DMP/FMS installation guidelines from the PROFIBUS user organization. This con-tains important information about the cable arrangement and commission-ing of PROFIBUS networks.

Publisher:PROFIBUS User Organization e. V.Haid-und-Neu-Straße 776131 Karlsruhe, Germany

Tel.: ++721 / 9658 590Fax: ++721 / 9658 589Internet: http://www.profibus.comGuidelines, order no. 2.111

Installation of bus termination modules

The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily designed for use in MCC motor feeders. It provides a proper bus termination even for removed MCC plug-in units. The bus termination module can also be utilized when no (SUB-D) standard plug can be used in the last device on a bus line. The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module can also be connected to 220/230 V, 380/400 V, 115/120 V or 24 V AC. The 3UF1900-1KB00 version can also be used for 24 V DC.

Figure 11-11: Bus termination module


http://www.profibus.com


SIMOCODE pro

11-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Commissioning and Servicing 12In this chapter

In this chapter you will find e.g. information on how SIMOCODE pro is com-missioned, how components are replaced and how statistics are read.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• commissioners• technicians• maintenance and service personnel.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• general basic knowledge about SIMOCODE pro e.g. from chapter 1• SIMOCODE ES software• configuring the PROFIBUS DP address.


Commissioning and Servicing

12.1 General information about commissioning and

servicing

Notes

Warning

Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electrical shock andburns. Disconnect the device from the system before beginning work.

Attention

Follow the information contained in the operating manual.

Conditions

The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and ser-vicing:• SIMOCODE pro is already mounted and wired• the motor is switched off

Notes on parameterizing

You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:• with the memory module - where parameters from a basic unit were already

saved: the memory module is plugged into the system interface. If the memory module is on the system interface and the supply voltage returns to the basic unit, then the basic unit is automatically parameterized by the memory module. The parameters can also be loaded into the basic unit by pressing the test/reset button.

• with the SIMOCODE ES software via the serial interface:The PC/programming device is connected to the system interface with the PC cable.

• with an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via PROFIBUS DP: For this, the PROFIBUS DP cable is connected to the PROFIBUS DP interface of the basic unit.

Possible cases for commissioning

There are 2 possible cases for commissioning:

1. Standard case: SIMOCODE pro was not yet parameterized and has the basic factory default settings:When connected to PROFIBUS DP, the “bus” LED flashes green if a DP master is connected.

2. SIMOCODE pro was already parameterized:– the parameters were already loaded into the basic unit in advance.– the parameters from a previous application are still present. Check if the

parameters e.g. set current are correct for the new application. Change these correspondingly, if necessary.

SIMOCODE pro

12-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


12.2 Commissioning

12.2.1 Sequence of steps

Note the information in the previous chapter "General information about commissioning and servicing" on page 12-2.

Carry out the following steps to commission SIMOCODE pro:

Table 12-1: Commissioning the basic unit

Schematic

Figure 12-1: Schematic for commissioning the basic unit

Step Description

1 Switch on the supply voltage. In an error-free state, the following LEDS should light up or flash green:• “Device” (light up green)• “Bus” if PROFIBUS DP is connected. (light up/flash)Continue with step 2.Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. You will find further information in chapter "Diagnostics via LED display" on page 12-5. Try to rectify the error.

2 If you want to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the PROFIBUS DP address. You will find further information on this in chapter "Setting the PROFIBUS DP address" on page 12-4.

3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the current parameterization e.g. with a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed.For this, connect the PC/programming device to the system interface with the PC cable.Attention! For basic unit 1, (SIMOCODE pro C) only use the system inter-

face on the front!


PC cable,Order number 3UF7940-0AA00-0



12.2.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

First you have to set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit. For this, there are the following options:• with the addressing plug• with SIMOCODE ES

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with the addressing plug


Table 12-2: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with the addressing plug

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with SIMOCODE ES


Table 12-3: Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with SIMOCODE ES

Step Description

1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.The switches are numbered.Example address 21: Put the “16”+“4”+“1” switches into the “ON position”.

2 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The “Device” LED lights up yellow.

3 Press the test/reset button for a short period of time. The set address is accepted. The “Device” LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

4 Pull the addressing plug out of the system interface.

Step Description



3 Click on the menu Switchgear >Open online.

4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.Press OK to confirm.

5 Open the dialog Device parameters >Bus parameters.

6 Select the DP address.

7 Save the data in the basic unit withTarget system > Load in switchgear. The address is set.

SIMOCODE pro

12-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


12.2.3 Diagnostics via LED display

The basic units and the operating panel have 3 LEDs which display certain device states:

Table 12-4: Diagnostics via LED display

LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for

errors

Device Device status

Green Device ready for use —

Greenflickering

Internal error Send back the basic unit

Yellow Memory module or addressing plug recogni-zed, test/reset buttons control the memory module or addressing plug

—

Yellowflashing

Memory module/ addressing plug read in; basic factory default set-tings configured (dura-tion: 3 s)

—

Yellowflickering

Memory module pro-grammed (duration: 3 s)

—

Red Faulty parameterization Parameterize anew and switch the control voltage off and on again

Basic unit defective (also gen. fault on)

Replace the basic unit!

Redflashing

Memory module,addressing plugExpansion module defec-tive (also gen. fault on - flashing)

Reprogram/replace the memory module, replace the expansion module

Off supply voltage too low Check if the supply voltage is connected/tur-ned on

Bus Bus sta-tus

Off Bus not connected or bus error

Connect the bus or check the bus parame-ters

Greenflashing

Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/programming device

—

Green Communication with PLC/DCS

—

Gen. Fault

Error status

Red Error present; reset is saved

Rectify error, e.g. over-load

Redflashing

Error present; no reset saved

Rectify error, e.g. over-load

Off no error —



12.3 Servicing

12.3.1 Preventive maintenance

Preventive maintenance is an important step in avoiding faults and unfore-seen costs. Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance in order to e.g. prevent halts in production due to plant downtimes. Preventive maintenance ensures that all components always work properly.

Reading out the statistics data

SIMOCODE pro makes statistics data available, which you e.g. can read out with SIMOCODE ES under Target system > Service data/statistics data. For example, by specifying “Motor operating hours” and “Number of starts” you can decide whether motor and/or motor contactors should be replaced.

Figure 12-2: Reading out statistic data

SIMOCODE pro

12-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


12.3.2 Saving the parameters

Always save the parameters in the memory module or in aSIMOCODE ES file. This applies especially if you replace a basic unit or if you want to transfer data from one basic unit to another.

Saving parameters from the basic unit in the memory module


Table 12-5: Saving the parameters in the memory module.

Saving parameters from the basic unit in a SIMOCODE ES file


Table 12-6: Saving parameters in a SIMOCODE ES file

Step Description

1 Plug the PC memory module into the system interface. The “Device” LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the “Test/reset” button for approx. 3 seconds. The parameters are saved in the memory module. After a successful data transfer, the “Device” LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.

Step Description



3 Open the menu Target system > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded into the main memory from the basic unit.

4 Click on the menu Switchgear >Save copy as .... The parameters from the main memory are saved in a SIMOCODE ES file.



Saving parameters from the memory module in the basic unit


Table 12-7: Saving parameters from the memory module in the basic unit

Attention

When the memory module is plugged in, the parameters are transferred from the memory module to the basic unit.

Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit


Table 12-8: Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file to a basic unit

Step Description

1 Plug the memory module into the system interface. The “Device” LED lights up yellow for approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the “test/reset” but-ton for a short period of time. The parameters are saved in the basic unit. After a successful data transfer, the “Device” LED lights up yellow for approx. 3 seconds.

2 If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.

Step Description



3 Click on the menu Switchgear>Open. The parameters from the SIMOCODE ES file are saved in the main memory.

4 Click on the menu Target system > Load into switchgear. The parameters are loaded from the main memory into the basic unit.

SIMOCODE pro

12-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


12.3.3 Replace SIMOCODE pro components

Replacing a basic unit


Table 12-9: Replacing a basic unit

Replacing expansion units


Table 12-10: Replacing a basic unit

Step Description

1 Save the parameters. You will find more information on this in chapter "Saving the parameters" on page 12-7.

2 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit.

3 If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable from the system interface.

4 Remove the detachable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.

5 Demount the basic unit.

6 Remove the detachable terminals of the new basic unit.

7 Mount the new basic unit.

8 Plug in the wired detachable terminals.

9 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.

10 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.

11 Save the parameters in the basic unit. You will find more information on this in chapter "Saving the parameters" on page 12-7.

12 Switch on the main power for the feeder.

Step Description

1 Switch off the main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit.

2 If necessary, pull out the PC cable, the cover or the connecting cable from the system interface.

3 Remove the detachable terminals. You do not need to remove the wiring.

4 Demount the expansion module.

5 Remove the detachable terminals of the new expansion unit.

6 Mount the new expansion module.

7 Plug in the wired detachable terminals.

8 Plug the connecting cable into the system interface.

9 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.

10 Switch on the main power for the feeder.



12.3.4 Configuring the basic factory default setting

With the basic factory default settings, all parameters are reset to the fac-tory values.

Configuring the basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic

device


Table 12-11: Configuring basic factory default settings with the test/reset button on the basic device

Notes

Attention

If one of the steps is not carried out correctly, the basic unit reverts to nor-mal operation.

Attention

This function is always active, independent of the “test/reset buttons lok-ked” parameter.

Configuring the basic factory default settings with the SIMOCODE ES software

Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected via PROFIBUS DP or via the system interface with PC/programming device and started with SIMOCODE ES.


Table 12-12: Configuring the basic factory setting with the SIMOCODE ES software

Step Description

1 Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.

2 Press the test/reset button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.

3 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The “Device” LED lights up yellow.

4 Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.

5 Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.

6 Release the test/reset button after approx. two seconds.

7 Press the test/reset button again after approx. two seconds.

9 Basic factory default setting is configured.

Step Description

1 Click on the menu Switchgear >Open online.

2 In the menu, select Target system > Command > Basic factory setting.

3 Press “Yes” to confirm.

4 Basic factory default settings are configured.

SIMOCODE pro

12-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Tables A In this chapter

In this chapter you will find various tables which can help you when working with SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-1

Tables

A.1 Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and

status signals/messages for the control functions

Table A-1: Active control stations, contactor/lamp controls and status signals/messages for the control functions

Spec

ifica

tion/

Cont

rol f

unct

ion

Cont

rol s

tatio

nCo

ntac

tor c

ontro

l

Lam

p co

ntro

l

QLE

<<(O

N<<

)Q

LE<

(ON

<)Q

LA(O

FF)

QLE

>(O

N>)

QLE

>>(O

N>>

)

Stat

us s

igna

l

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

QE1

QE2

QE3

QE4

QE5

ON

<<O

N<

OFF

ON

>O

N>>

Ove

rloa

d 1)

,2)

--

--

--

-Ac

tive

--

--

--

-

Dire

ct s

tarte

r 1),2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

--

--

-OF

FON

-

Reve

rsin

g st

arte

r 1),2

)-

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Righ

tLe

ft-

--

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Circ

uit b

reak

er 1

),2)

--

OFF

ON-

ON puls

eOF

Fpu

lse

--

--

-OF

FON

-

Star

-del

tast

arte

r 2)

--

OFF

ON-

Star

cont

acto

rDe

ltaco

ntac

tor

Net

wor

kco

ntac

tor

--

--

OFF

ON-

Star

-del

ta s

tart

erw

ith re

vers

al o

f the

dire

ctio

n of

rota

tion

2)

Left

OFF

Righ

t-

Star

cont

acto

rDe

ltaco

ntac

tor

Righ

tne

twor

kco

ntac

tor

Left

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-

Dah

land

er 2

)-

-OF

FSl

owFa

stFa

stSl

owFa

stSt

arco

ntac

tor

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Dah

land

erw

ith re

vers

al o

f the

dire

ctio

n of

rota

tion

2)

Left

Fast

Left

Slow

OFF

Righ

tSl

owRi

ght

Fast

Righ

tFa

stRi

ght

Slow

Fast

Star

cont

acto

r

Left

Slow

Left

Fast

Left

Fast

Left

Slow

OFF

Righ

tSl

owRi

ght

Fast

Pole

-cha

ngin

g sw

itch

2)-

-OF

FSl

owFa

stFa

stSl

ow-

--

--

OFF

Slow

Fast

Pole

-cha

ngin

g sw

itch

with

reve

rsal

of t

he d

irect

ion

of ro

tatio

n 2)

Left

Fast

Left

Slow

OFF

Righ

tSl

owRi

ght

Fast

Righ

tFa

stRi

ght

Slow

-Le

ftSl

owLe

ftFa

stLe

ftFa

stLe

ftSl

owOF

FRi

ght

Slow

Righ

tFa

st

Valv

e 2)

--

Clos

edOp

en-

Open

--

--

--

Clos

edOp

en-

Slid

er 1

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Slid

er 2

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Slid

er 3

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Slid

er 4

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Slid

er 5

2)

-Cl

osed

Stop

Open

-Op

enCl

osed

--

--

Clos

edSt

opOp

en-

Soft

star

ter 2

)-

-OF

FON

-ON

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

-Re

set

ONco

mm

and

--

-OF

FON

-

Soft

reve

rsin

g st

arte

r2)

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-Ri

ght

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

Left

netw

ork

cont

acto

r

Rese

tON

com

man

d-

-Le

ftOF

FRi

ght

-

1) B

asic

uni

t 1,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oC

2) B

asic

uni

t 2,

SIM

OC

OD

Epr

oV

SIMOCODE pro

A-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Tables

A.2 Abbreviations and Specifications

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations are used in the tables:

Specifications

The following specifications apply in the tables:

Abbreviation Meaning Note

BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)

BU2 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro V)

IM Current measurement module

UM Current/voltage measurement modu-les

Available from mid 2005

DM1 Digital module 1


OP Operator panel

AM Analog module Available from mid 2005

EM Earth-fault module Available from mid 2005

TM Temperature module Available from mid 2005

Th Thermistor

CF Control function

Cycl. Cyclic

Acycl. Acyclic

Table A-2: Abbreviations

Specification Type Range Unit Info

Reserved Byte[4]

Cos φ Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2

Reserved Byte[5]

Max. current Imax Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie BU1 BU2

Grayed entries only availablefrom the middle of 2005

Entry relevant for basic unit 1 and basic unit 2

Example

Entries in italics not relevant (reserved)and, when writing,

should be filled with “0”

SIMOCODE IIIGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 A-3

Tables

A.3 Socket assignment table - digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (Nr.) of the sockets (digital). You only need these assignment numbers if, in a user program, you fill data records and write these back (for example).

Nr. Specification Specification Information

0 Static level Not connected BU1/BU2

1 Fixed level value‚ 0 BU1/BU2

2 Fixed level value‚ 1 BU1/BU2

3 Reserved

4 Reserved

5 Reserved

6 Reserved

7 Reserved

8 Basic unit BU BU - test/reset button BU1/BU2

9 BU - input 1 BU1/BU2




13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

16 Digital expansion modules DM DM1 - input 1 DM1

17 DM1 - input 2 DM1







24 Reserved

25 Reserved

26 Reserved

27 Reserved

28 Reserved

29 Reserved

30 Reserved

31 Reserved

32 Operator panel OP OP - test/reset button OP

33 OP - button 1 OP

34 OP - button 2 OP

35 OP - button 3 OP

36 OP - button 4 OP

37 Reserved

Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital

SIMOCODE pro

A-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Tables

38 Reserved

39 Reserved

40 DPV1/RS-232 interface Acyclic control data - bit 0.0 BU1/BU2

41 (Acyclic data) Acyclic control data - bit 0.1 BU1/BU2

42 Acyclic control data - bit 0.2 BU1/BU2














56 PLC/DCS interface PLC [DPV0] Cyclic control data - bit 0.0 BU1/BU2

57 (cyclic data) Cyclic control data - bit 0.1 BU1/BU2

58 Cyclic control data - bit 0.2 BU1/BU2














72 Enabled control command Enabled control command ON<<

73 Enabled control command ON<

74 Enabled control command OFF

75 Enabled control command ON>

76 Enabled control command ON>>

77 Reserved

78 Reserved

79 Reserved


Table A-3: Socket assignment table - digital (cont.)


Tables

80 Contactor controls Contactor control 1 QE1

dependent of the control function

81 Contactor control 2 QE2




85 Reserved

86 Reserved

87 Reserved

88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<< (ON<<)


89 Display - QLE< (ON<)

90 Display - QLA (OFF)

91 Display - QLE> (ON>)

92 Display - QLE>> (ON>>)

93 Display - QLS (fault) BU1/BU2

94 Reserved

95 Reserved

96 Status signals - general Status - general fault BU1/BU2

97 Status - general warning BU1/BU2

98 Status - device BU1/BU2

99 Status - bus BU1/BU2

100 Status - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2

101 Status - current flows Current measure-ment

102 Reserved

103 Reserved

104 Status signals - controlling Status - ON<<


105 Status - ON<

106 Status - OFF

107 Status - ON>

108 Status - ON>>

109 Status - start active BU1/BU2

110 Status - interlocking time active all reversing star-ters and sliders

111 Status - switching interval active Star-delta, Dahlan-der, pole-changing switches

112 Status - runs in open direction


113 Status - runs in closed direction

114 Status - FC

115 Status - FO

116 Status - TC

117 Status - TO

118 Status - cold starting (TPF) BU1/BU2

119 Status - OPO BU2



SIMOCODE pro

A-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Tables

120 Status - automatic mode of ope-ration

BU1/BU2

121 Status signals - protection Status - emergency start execu-ted

Current measure-ment

122 Status - cooling down time active Current measure-ment

123 Status - pause time active Current measure-ment

124 Status signals - miscellaneous Status - device test active BU1/BU2

125 Status - phase sequence 1-2-3 UM

126 Status - phase sequence 3-2-1 UM

127 Reserved

128 Signals - protection Signal - overload operation Current measure-ment

129 Signal - asymmetry Current measure-ment

130 Signal - overload Current measure-ment

131 Signal - overload + phase failure Current measure-ment

132 Signal - internal earth fault Current measure-ment

133 Signal - external earth fault EM

134 Reserved

135 Signal - thermistor overload Th

136 Signal - thermistor short circuit Th

137 Signal - thermistor wire break Th

138 Signal - TM warning T> TM

139 Signal - TM tripping T> TM

140 Signal - TM sensor error TM

141 Signal - TM out of range TM

142 Reserved

143 Reserved

144 Signals - level monitoring Signal - warning I> Current measure-ment

145 Signal - warning I< Current measure-ment

146 Signal - warning P> UM

147 Signal - warning P< UM

148 Signal - warning cosφ< UM

149 Signal - warning U< UM

150 Signal - warning 0/4-20 mA> AM

151 Signal - warning 0/4-20 mA< AM

152 Signal - tripping I> Current measure-ment

153 Signal - tripping I< Current measure-ment




Tables

154 Signal - tripping P> UM

155 Signal - tripping P< UM

156 Signal - tripping cosφ< UM

157 Signal - tripping U< UM

158 Signal - tripping 0/4-20 mA> AM

159 Signal - tripping 0/4-20 mA< AM

160 Signal - blocking Current measure-ment

161 Reserved

162 Reserved

163 Signal - no start permitted BU1/BU2

164 Signal - number of starts > BU1/BU2

165 Signal - another start permitted BU1/BU2

166 Signal - motor operating hours > BU1/BU2

167 Signal - stopped time > BU1/BU2

168 Signal - limit value 1 BU2




172 Signals - miscellaneous Signal - external fault 1 BU1/BU2

173 Signal - external fault 2 BU1/BU2



176 Signal - external fault 5 BU2

177 Signal - external fault 6 BU2

178 Reserved

179 Reserved

180 Signal - analog module wire break

AM

181 Reserved

182 Reserved

183 Reserved

184 Signals - timestamp function Signal - timestamp function active+ok

BU2

185 Reserved

186 Reserved

187 Reserved

188 Signals - system interface Signal - configured operator panel is missing

BU1/BU2

189 Reserved

190 Reserved

191 Reserved

192 Faults - general Fault - HW fault basic unit BU1/BU2

193 Fault - module fault BU1/BU2



SIMOCODE pro

A-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Tables

194 Fault - temp components BU1/BU2

195 Fault - configuration fault BU1/BU2

196 Fault - parameterization BU1/BU2

197 Fault - bus BU1/BU2

198 Fault - PLC/DCS BU1/BU2

199 Reserved

200 Faults - controlling Fault - runtime ON

not for overload relay

201 Fault - runtime OFF

202 Fault - F ON

203 Fault - F OFF

204 Fault - blocking slider Silder

205 Fault - double 0 Valve/silder

206 Fault - double 1 Valve/silder

207 Fault - end position Valve/silder

208 Fault - antivalence Slider

209 Fault - cold starting (TPF) error BU1/BU2

210 Fault - UVO error BU2

211 Fault - OPO error BU2

212 Reserved

213 Reserved

214 Reserved

215 Reserved

216 Freely programmable elements Truth table 1 3I/1O output BU1/BU2

217 Truth table 2 3I/1O output BU1/BU2

218 Truth table 3 3I/1O output BU1/BU2

219 Truth table 4 3I/1O output BU2





224 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1 BU2

225 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2 BU2

226 Reserved

227 Reserved

228 Reserved

229 Reserved

230 Reserved

231 Reserved

232 Timer 1 output BU1/BU2

233 Timer 2 output BU1/BU2

234 Timer 3 output BU2

235 Timer 4 output BU2

236 Counter 1 output BU1/BU2

237 Counter 2 output BU1/BU2




Tables

238 Counter 3 output BU2

239 Counter 4 output BU2

240 Signal conditioning 1 output BU1/BU2

241 Signal conditioning 2 output BU1/BU2

242 Signal conditioning 3 output BU2

243 Signal conditioning 4 output BU2

244 Non-volatile element 1 output BU1/BU2

245 Non-volatile element 2 output BU1/BU2

246 Non-volatile element 3 output BU2

247 Non-volatile element 4 output BU2

248 Flashing 1 output BU1/BU2



251 Flickering 1 output BU1/BU2



254 Reserved

255 Reserved



SIMOCODE pro

A-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Tables

A.4 Socket assignment table - analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (Nr.) of the sockets (analog). You only need these assignment numbers if, in a user program, you fill data records and write these back (for example).All inputs for analog data can only process values of type “word” (2 bytes). In order to be also able to process values of type “byte”, the following app-lies:• the byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0

Nr. Specification Unit Information

0 Not connected BU1/BU2

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 Reserved

4 Timer 1 - actual value 100 ms BU1/BU2

5 Timer 2 - actual value 100 ms BU1/BU2

6 Timer 3 - actual value 100 ms BU2

7 Timer 4 - actual value 100 ms BU2

8 Timer 1 - actual value BU1/BU2

9 Timer 2 - actual value BU1/BU2

10 Timer 3 - actual value BU2

11 Timer 4 - actual value BU2

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

16 Max. current I_max 1%/Ie Current measurement

17 Current I_L1 1%/Ie Current measurement



20 Phase asymmetry 1% Current measurement

21 Reserved

22 Reserved

23 Reserved

24 Voltage U_L1 1V UM



27 Cos phi 1% UM

28 Reserved

29 Reserved

30 Reserved

31 Reserved

32 Heating up of the motor model Current measurement

33 Time to trip 100 ms Current measurement

Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog


Tables

1) S7 format: 0/4mA=020mA=27648

34 Recovery time 100 ms Current measurement

35 Last tripping current 1%/Ie Current measurement

36 TM - Temperature 1 K TM

37 TM - Temperature 1 1 K TM



40 Permitted starts - actual value BU1/BU2

41 Stopped time 1h BU1/BU2

42 Reserved

43 Reserved

44 AM - input See 1) AM

45 TM - temperature 1K TM

46 Reserved

47 Reserved

48 Acyclic control data - analog value BU1/BU2

49 Cyclic control data - analog value BU1 BU2

50 Reserved

51 Reserved

52 Motor operating hours - H-word1s

BU1 BU2

53 Motor operating hours - L-word BU1 BU2

54 Int. motor operating hours - H-word1s

BU1 BU2

55 Int. motor operating hours - L-word BU1 BU2

56 Device operating hours - H-word1s

BU1 BU2

57 Device operating hours - L-word BU1 BU2

58 Number of starts - H-word BU1 BU2

59 Number of starts - L-word BU1 BU2

60 Int. number of starts right - H-word BU1 BU2

61 Int. number of starts right - L-word BU1 BU2

62 Int. number of starts left - H-word BU1 BU2

63 Int. number of starts left - L-word BU1 BU2

64 Reserved

.. Reserved

69 Reserved

70 Real power - H-word1W

BU2

71 Real power - L-word BU2

72 Apparent power - H-word1VA

BU2

73 Apparent power - L-word BU2

75 Reserved

.. Reserved

255 Reserved

Nr. Specification Unit Information

Table A-4: Socket assignment table - analog (cont.)

SIMOCODE pro

A-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Tables

A.5 Detailled signals of the slave diagnosis

This table contains the detailled signals of the slave diagnosis for the status signals and the prozess alarm. This information is also contained in the data record 92.

Byte.Bit Status signal Info

1.0 Faults controlling Fault - Ausführung Ein-Befehl

1.1 Fault - Ausführung Aus-Befehl

1.2 Fault - F Ein

1.3 Fault - F Aus

1.4 Fault - blocked slider slider

1.5 Fault - double 0 slider

1.6 Fault - double 1 slider

1.7 Fault - Endlage slider

2.0 Fault - antivalence slider

2.1 Fault - cold starting (TPF)-error BU1 BU2

2.2 Fault - UVO error BU2

2.3 Fault - UVO error BU2

2.4 reserved

3.0 Faults - protection reserved

3.1 Fault - asymmetriy Current measurement

3.2 Fault - overload Current measurement

3.3 Fault - overload + phase failure Current measurement

3.4 Fault - Int. earth fault Current measurement

3.5 Fault - Ext. earth fault EM

3.6 reserved

3.7 Fault - thermistor overload Th

4.0 Fault - thermistor short circuit Th

4.1 Fault - Thermistor wire break Th

4.2 reserved

4.3 Fault - TM Auslösung T> TM

4.4 Fault - TM Sensorfehler TM

4.5 Fault - TM Out of range TM

4.6 reserved

5.0 Faults - level monitoring

Fault - tripping I> Current measurement

5.1 Fault - tripping I< Current measurement

5.2 Fault - tripping P> UM

5.3 Fault - trippingP< UM

5.4 Fault - tripping cosφ< UM

5.5 Fault - tripping U< UM

5.6 Fault - tripping 0/4-20mA> AM

5.7 Fault - tripping0/4-20mA< AM

6.0 Fault - blocking Current measurement

6.1 reserved

Table A-5: Detailed signals of the slave diagnosis


Tables

6.4 Fault - number of starts> BU1 BU2

6.5 reserved

7.0 Faults - miscellaneous

Fault - ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2

7.1 Fault - ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2



7.4 Fault - ext. fault 5 BU2

7.5 Fault - ext. fault 6 BU2

7.6 reserved

7.7 reserved

8.0 Fault - analogue module wire break AM

8.1 Fault - test shutdown BU1 BU2

8.2 reserved

9.0 Warnings - protection Warning - overload protection Current measurement

9.1 Warning - asymmetry Current measurement

9.2 Warning - overload Current measurement

9.3 Warning - overload+ phase failure Current measurement

9.4 Warning - internal earth fault Current measurement

9.5 Warning - external earth fault EM

9.6 reserved

9.7 Warning - thermistor overload Th

10.0 Warning - thermistor short circuit Th

10.1 Warning - thermistor wire break Th

10.2 Warning - TM warnung T> TM

10.3 reserved

10.4 Warning - TM sensor error TM

10.5 Warning - TM out of range TM

10.6 reserved

11.0 Warnings - level monitoring

Warning - warning I> Current measurement

11.1 Warning - warning I< Current measurement

11.2 Warning - warning P> UM

11.3 Warning - warning P< UM

11.4 Warning - warning cosφ< UM

11.5 Warning - warning U< UM

11.6 Warning - warning 0/4-20mA> AM

11.7 Warning - Warning 0/4-20mA< AM

12.0 Warning - Blocking Current measurement

12.1 reserved

12.3 Warning - no start permitted BU1 BU2

12.4 Warning - number of starts > BU1 BU2

12.5 Warning - another start permitted BU1 BU2

12.6 Warning - motor operation hours > BU1 BU2

12.7 Warning - stopped time t > BU1 BU2


Table A-5: Detailed signals of the slave diagnosis (cont.)

SIMOCODE pro

A-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Tables

13.0 Warnings - miscellaneous

Warning - ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2

13.1 Warning - ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2



13.4 Warning - ext. fault 5 BU2

13.5 Warning - ext. fault 6 BU2

13.6 reserved

13.7 reserved

14.0 Warnung - analog module wire break

AM

14.1 reserved

15.0 reserved

15.1 Status signals - pro-tection

Status - emergency start executed

15.2 Status - cooling down time active

15.3 reserved

15.4 reserved

15.5 reserved

15.6 Status signals - cont-rolling

Status - cold starting (TPF) BU1 BU2

15.7 reserved

16.0 Signals -parameterization

Signal - start-up parameter block active

BU1 BU2

16.1 Signal - Parameter change not permitted in the current operating state

BU1 BU2

16.2 Signal - device does not support the required functions

BU1 BU2

16.3 Signal - parameter faulty BU1 BU2

16.4 Signal - wrong password BU1 BU2

16.5 reserved

16.6 reserved

16.7 reserved


Table A-5: Detailed signals of the slave diagnosis (cont.)


Tables

SIMOCODE pro

A-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Data Formats and Data Records BIn this chapter

In this chapter you will find information about the data records of SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups


Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• good knowledge about writing and reading data records• good knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.

Data records - overview

Data record

number

Description Read/write

67 Process image of the outputs Read

69 Process image of the inputs Read

92 Device diagnostics(faults, warnings, signals)

Read

94 Measured values Read

95 Service/statistics data Read/write

130 Base device parameter 1 (BU1 BU2) Read/write

131 Base device parameter 2 (BU1 BU2) Read/write

132 Extended device parameter 1 (BU2) Read/write

133 Extended device parameter 2 (BU2) Read/write

139 Labeling Read/write

160 Communication parameters Read/write

165 Designation Read/write

202 Acyclic control data Read/write

203 Acyclic signaling data Read

224 Password protection Write

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 B-1


B.1 Handling data records

This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data records.

B.1.1 Writing/reading data records

Access to data records via slot and index

• Slot: access via slot 1• Index: data record number

Writing/reading data records with STEP7

You can access the data records from the user program.• Writing data records:

S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 53 “WR_REC” or SFC 58S7 master: by calling SFC 58

• Reading data records:S7 DPV1 master: by calling SFB 52 “RD_REC” or SFC 59S7 master: by calling SFC 59

Further information

You will find further information on the SFBs • in the “System software for S7-300/400, system and standard functions”

reference manual• in the STEP7 online help.

Byte arrangements

When data which is longer than one byte is saved, then the bytes are arran-ged as follows (“big endian”):

Figure B-1: Byte arrangement in the “big endian” format

Byte 0

Byte 1

High byte

Low byte

High byte

Low byte

High byte

Low byte

High word

Low word

Data type

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte 2

Byte 3

Byte 0

Byte 1

Byte arrangements

Byte

Word

Double word (D-word)

SIMOCODE pro

B-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


B.1.2 Abbreviations

The fallowing abbreviations are used in the tables:

B.1.3 Specifications

The following specifications apply in the tables:

Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system com-ponents are used.

Abbreviation Meaning Note

BU1 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro C)

BU2 Basic unit 1 (SIMOCODE pro V)

IM Current measurement module

UM Current/voltage measurement modu-les

Available from mid 2005



OP Operator panel

AM Analog module Available from mid 2005

EM Earth-fault module Available from mid 2005

TM Temperature module Available from mid 2005

Th Thermistor

CF Control function

Cycl. Cyclic

Acycl. Acyclic

Table B-1: Abbreviations

Specification Type Range Unit Info

Reserved Byte[4]

Cos φ Byte 0 .. 100 1% BU2

Reserved Byte[5]

max. current Imax Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie BU1 BU2

Grayed entries onlyavailable from mid 2005

Entry is relevant for basic

Example

Entries in italics are not relevant (reserved)and, when writing,

should be filled with “0”

unit 1 and basic unit 2



B.2 Data record 67 - process image of the outputs

Base types (cyclic control data PLC --> SIMOCODE pro)

Byte.Bit Specification Presetting

(see also

parameter)

Type Info

0.0 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON<

Bit

BU1 BU2

0.1 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF

Bit

0.2 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON>

Bit

0.3 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit

0.4 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.4 Motor protection - Emergency start

Bit

0.5 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit

0.6 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit

0.7 Cyclic controlling - bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit









2.0 to3.7

Cyclic controlling - analog value

Not assigned Word BU2

Table B-2: Data record 67 - process image of the outputs


Base type 1(available from mid 2005)

4 bytes of control data

Cyclic controlling - bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU2

Cyclic controlling - analog value

Base type 2 2 bytes of control data

Cyclic controlling - bits 0.0 to 1.7

BU1 BU2

SIMOCODE pro

B-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


B.3 Data record 69 - process image of the inputs

Base types (cyclic signaling data SIMOCODE pro --> PLC)

Byte.Bit Specification Presetting

(see also

parameter)

Type Info

0.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Status - ON< Bit

BU1 BU2

0.1 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.1 Status - OFF Bit

0.2 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.2 Status - ON> Bit

0.3 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.3 Signal - overload operation

Bit

0.4 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.4 Status - interlocking time active

Bit

0.5 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.5 Status - automatic mode of operation

Bit

0.6 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.6 Status - general fault

Bit

0.7 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.7 Status - general warning

Bit

1.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit








2.0 PLC/DCS analog input 1 Max. current I_max Word

4.0 PLC/DCS analog input 2 Not assigned Word BU2



Table B-3: Data record 69 - process image of the inputs


Base type 1(available from mid 2005)

10 bytes of signaling data

Cyclic signaling - bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU2

Cyclic signaling - analog inputs 1 to 4

Base type 2 4 bytes of signaling data

Cyclic signaling - bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU1

BU2

Cyclic signaling - analog input 1



B.4 Data record 92 - device diagnostics

Byte.Bit Specification Info DP

Diagn.*

0.0 Reserved

1.0 Status signals - general

Status - general fault

BU1 BU2

1.1 Status - general warning

BU1 BU2

1.2 Status - device BU1 BU21.3 Status - bus BU1 BU2

1.4 Status - PLC/DCS BU1 BU21.5 Status - motor current flo-

wingCurrent measu-rement

1.6 Reserved2.0 Status signals -

controllingStatus - ON<<

Depending on the CF

2.1 Status - ON<

2.2 Status - OFF2.3 Status - ON>2.4 Status - ON>>

2.5 Status - start active BU1 BU22.6 Status -

interlocking time activeall reversing star-ters and sliders

2.7 Status - pause time active

Star-delta, Dahl-ander, pole-chan-ging switches

3.0 Status - runs in open direc-tion

Depending on the CF

3.1 Status - runs in closed direction

3.2 Status - FC3.3 Status - FO3.4 Status - TC

3.5 Status - TO3.6 Status -

cold starting (TPF)BU1 BU2 M

3.7 Status - OPO BU24.0 Status - automatic mode

of operation BU1 BU2

4.1 Status signals -protection

Status - emergency start executed

Current measu-rement

M

4.2 Status - cooling down time active


M

4.3 Status - pause time active Current measu-rement

Table B-4: Data record 92 - diagnostics

SIMOCODE pro

B-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


4.4 Status signals - miscellaneous

Status - device test active

BU1 BU2

4.5 Status - phase sequence 1-2-3

UM

4.6 Status - phase sequence 3-2-1

UM

4.7 Reserved

5.0 Signals - protec-tion

Signal - overload operation


5.1 Signal - asymmetry


5.2 Signal - overload Current measu-rement

5.3 Signal - overload + phase failure


5.4 Signal - internal earth fault


5.5 Signal - external earth fault

EM

5.6 Res. signal - warning ext. EF

EM

5.7 Signal - thermistor overload

Th

6.0 Signal - thermistor short circuit

Th

6.1 Signal - thermistor wire break

Th

6.2 Signal - TM warning T> TM6.3 Signal - TM tripping T> TM

6.4 Signal - TM sensor error TM6.5 Signal - TM

Out of rangeTM

6.6 Reserved Current measu-rement

7.0 Signals - level monitoring

Signal - warning I>

7.1 Signal - warning I< Current measu-rement

7.2 Signal - warning P>

UM

7.3 Signal - warning P<

UM

7.4 Signal - warning cosφ<

UM

7.5 Signal - warning U<

UM

7.6 Signal - warning 0/4-20mA>

AM


Diagn.*

Table B-4: Data record 92 - diagnostics (cont.)



7.7 Signal - warning 0/4-20 mA<

AM

8.0 Signal - tripping I>


8.1 Signal - tripping I<

8.2 Signal - tripping P>

UM

8.3 Signal - tripping P<

UM

8.4 Signal - tripping cosφ<

UM

8.5 Signal - tripping U<

UM

8.6 Signal - tripping 0/4-20 mA>

AM

8.7 Signal - tripping 0/4-20 mA<

AM

9.0 Signal - blocking Current measu-rement

9.1 Reserved9.3 Signal - not start permitted BU1 BU29.4 Signal - number of starts > BU1 BU2

9.5 Signal - another start permitted

BU1 BU2

9.6 Signal - motor operating hours >

BU1 BU2

9.7 Signal - stopped time >

BU1 BU2

10.0 Signal - limit value 1 BU210.1 Signal - limit value 2 BU210.2 Signal - limit value 3 BU2

10.3 Signal - limit value 4 BU210.4 Signals - miscella-

neousSignal - external fault 1 BU1 BU2

10.5 Signal - external fault 2 BU1 BU210.6 Signal - external fault 3 BU1 BU2

10.7 Signal - external fault 4 BU1 BU211.0 Signal - external fault 5 BU211.1 Signal - external fault 6 BU2

11.2 Reserved

11.3 Reserved

11.4 Signal - analog module wire break

AM

11.5 Reserved


Diagn.*


SIMOCODE pro

B-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


12.0 Signals - timestamp func-tion

Signal - timestamp func-tion active+ok

BU2

12.1 Reserved12.4 Signals -

system interfaceSignals - configured opera-tor panel is missing

BU1 BU2

12.5 Signal - module not sup-ported

BU1 BU2

12.6 Reserved13.0 Signals - memory

moduleSignal - memory module read in

BU1 BU2

13.1 Signal - memory module programmed

BU1 BU2

13.2 Signal - memory module deleted

BU1 BU2

13.3 Reserved13.7 Signals - addres-

sing plugSignal - addressing plug read in

BU1 BU2

14.0 Signals - parame-terization

Signal - start-up parameter block active

BU1 BU2 M

14.1 Signal - parameter change not per-mitted in the current ope-rating state

BU1 BU2 M

14.2 Signal - device does not support the required functions

BU1 BU2 M

14.3 Signal - parameter faulty

BU1 BU2 M

14.4 Signal - wrong password

BU1 BU2 M

14.5 Signal - password protection active

BU1 BU2

14.6 Signal - basic factory default set-tings

BU1 BU2

14.7 Signal - parameterization active

BU1 BU2

15.0 Signal - prm error number (bytes) **

BU1 BU2

16.0 Reserved17.0 Warnings - pro-

tectionWarning - overload operation


W

17.1 Warning - asymmetry


W

17.2 Warning - overload Current measu-rement

W


Diagn.*




17.3 Warning - overload + phase failure


W

17.4 Warning - internal earth fault


W

17.5 Warning - external earth fault

EM W

17.6 Reserved

17.7 Warning - thermistor overload

Th W

18.0 Warning - thermistor short circuit

Th W

18.1 Warning - thermistor wire break

Th W

18.2 Warning - TM warning T>

TM W

18.3 Reserved18.4 Warning -

TM sensor errorTM W

18.5 Warning - TM out of range

TM W

18.6 Reserved

19.0 Warnings - level monitoring

Warning - Warning I>


W

19.1 Warning - Warning I<


W

19.2 Warning - Warning P>

UM W

19.3 Warning - Warning P<

UM W

19.4 Warning - warning cosφ<

UM W

19.5 Warning - Warning U<

UM W

19.6 Warning - warning 0/4-20 mA>

AM W

19.7 Warning - warning 0/4-20 mA<

AM W

20.0 Warning - blocking


W

20.1 Reserved20.4 Warning -

number of starts >BU1 BU2 W

20.5 Warning - another start permitted

BU1 BU2 W

20.6 Warning - motor operating hours >

BU1 BU2 W

20.7 Signal - stopped time >

BU1 BU2 W


Diagn.*


SIMOCODE pro

B-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


21.0 Warnings - mis-cellaneous

Warning - ext. fault 1 BU1 BU2 W

21.1 Warning - ext. fault 2 BU1 BU2 W

21.2 Warning - ext. fault 3 BU1 BU2 W21.3 Warning - ext. fault 4 BU1 BU2 W21.4 Warning - ext. fault 5 BU2 W

21.5 Warning - ext. fault 6 BU2 W21.6 Reserved

21.7 Reserved22.0 Warning - analog module

wire breakBU2 W

22.1 Reserved23.0 Faults - general Fault - HW fault basic unit BU1 BU2 F9

23.1 Fault - module fault BU1 BU2 F923.2 Fault - temp components

(e.g. memory module)BU1 BU2 F9

23.3 Fault - configuration fault BU1 BU2 F1623.4 Fault -

parameterizationBU1 BU2 F16

23.5 Fault - bus BU1 BU2

23.6 Fault - PLC/DCS BU1 BU223.7 Reserved24.0 Faults - control-

lingFault - runtime ON Current measu-

rementFAU

24.1 Fault - runtime OFF


FAU

24.2 Fault - F ON Current measu-rement

FAU

24.3 Fault - F OFF FAU

24.4 Fault - blocked slider

CF = slider FAU

24.5 Fault - double 0 CF = slider FAU24.6 Fault - double 1 CF = slider FAU24.7 Fault - end position CF = slider FAU

25.0 Fault - antivalence CF = slider FAU25.1 Fault - cold starting (TPF)

errorBU1 BU2 FAU

25.2 Fault - UVO error BU2 FAU25.3 Fault - OPO error BU2 FAU

25.4 Reserved26.0 Reserved26.1 Faults - protec-

tionFault - asymmetry Current measu-

rementFAU

26.2 Fault - overload Current measu-rement

FAU

26.3 Fault - overload + phase failure


FAU


Diagn.*




26.4 Fault - internal earth fault


FAU

26.5 Fault - external earth fault

EM FAU

26.6 Reserved

26.7 Fault - thermistor overload

Th FAU

27.0 Fault - thermistor short cir-cuit

Th FAU

27.1 Fault - thermistor wire break

Th FAU

27.2 Reserved27.3 Fault - TM

tripping T>TM FAU

27.4 Fault - TM sensor fault

TM FAU

27.5 Fault - TM out of range

TM FAU

27.6 Reserved

28.0 Faults - level monitoring

Fault - tripping I> Current measu-rement

FAU

28.1 Fault - tripping I< Current measu-rement

FAU

28.2 Fault - tripping P>

UM FAU

28.3 Fault - tripping P<

UM FAU

28.4 Fault - tripping cosφ<

UM FAU

28.5 Fault - tripping U<

UM FAU

28.6 Fault - tripping 0/4-20 mA>

AM FAU

28.7 Fault - tripping 0/4-20 mA<

AM FAU

29.0 Fault - blocking Current measu-rement

FAU

29.1 Reserved29.4 Fault - number of starts > BU1 BU2 FAU29.5 Reserved


Diagn.*


SIMOCODE pro

B-12 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


*) The “DP-Diagn.” column contains the bits which are additionally available in the dia-gnostics about PROFIBUS DP:F: FaultS: SignalW: WarningF9, F16: Error types

**)Signal - prm error number (bytes): If a parameterization is not possible, then the number of the parameter group which caused the error is transmitted here.You will find the parameter groups in the data records 130 to 133.

30.0 Faults - miscella-neous

Fault - fault 1 BU1 BU2 FAU

30.1 Fault - fault 2 BU1 BU2 FAU

30.2 Fault - fault 3 BU1 BU2 FAU30.3 Fault - fault 4 BU1 BU2 FAU30.4 Fault - fault 5 BU2 FAU

30.5 Fault - ext. fault 6 BU2 FAU30.6 Reserved

30.7 Reserved31.0 Fault -

analog module wire breakAM FAU

31.1 Fault - test shutdown

BU1 BU2 FAU

31.2 Reserved


Diagn.*


Example parameter group

Byte.Bit description

(Prm group)

0.0 coordination

4.0 device configuration(see above) (12)

12.0 Bit parameter (16)

15.6 Ext. fault 3 - effectiveness

parameter group 12

parameter group 16

. . .

. . .

. .

.



B.5 Data record 94 - measured values

1) S7 format: 0/4mA = 020mA = 27648

2) Representaion “heating up the motor model”: Value always refers to symmetrical tripping level, Representation in 2% steps in

Bits 6..0 (range 0 to 254%), Bit 7 shows asymmetry (fixed level 50%).

3) Representation in Kelvin.

Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit Info

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]4.0 Heating up of the

motor modelByte 0 .. 255 See 2) Current measurement

5.0 Phase asymmetry Byte 0 .. 100 1% Current measurement6.0 Cos φ Byte 0 .. 100 1% UM7.0 Reserved Byte[5]12.0 Max. current Imax Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie Current measurement14.0 Current IL1 Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie Current measurement16.0 Current IL2 Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie Current measurement18.0 Current IL3 Word 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie Current measurement20.0 Last tripping cur-

rentWord 0 .. 65535 1% / Ie Current measurement

22.0 Time to trip Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms Current measurement24.0 Recovery time Word 0 .. 65535 100 ms Current measurement26.0 Voltage UL1 Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM28.0 Voltage UL2 Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM30.0 Voltage UL3 Word 0 .. 65535 1 V UM32.0 AM - Output Word 0 .. 27648 siehe1) AM34.0 AM - Input 1 Word 0 .. 27648 AM36.0 AM - Input2 Word 0 .. 27648 AM38.0 Reserved Word40.0 TM - Temperature Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see3) TM42.0 TM - Temperature

1Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see3) TM

44.0 TM - Temperature 2

Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see3) TM

46.0 TM - Temperature 3

Word 0 .. 65535 1 K see3) TM

48.0 Reserved Byte[4]52.0 Real power D-word 0 ..

0xFFFFFFFF1 W UM

56.0 Apparent power D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF

1 VA UM

60.0 Reserved Byte[14]

Table B-5: Data record 94 - measured values

SIMOCODE pro

B-14 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


B.6 Data record 95 - Service/statistics data

Writing the service/statistics data

Writing is only possible if the password protection is not active.

Additional abbreviations

r/w: value can be written/ changedr: value can only be read

Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit Info

0.0 Reserved Byte[4] 0

4.0 Permitted starts - actual value

Byte 0 .. 255 r/w BU1 BU2

5.0 Reserved Byte8.0 Number of parameteriza-

tionsWord 0 .. 65535 r BU1

BU210.0 Number of

overload trippingsWord 0 .. 65535 r/w BU1

BU212.0 Internal number

overload trippingsWord 0 .. 65535 r BU1

BU214.0 Stopped time Word 0 .. 65535 1 h r/w BU1

BU216.0 Timer 1 - actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1


BU220.0 Timer 3 - actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU222.0 Timer 4 - actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU224.0 Timer 1 - actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU1


BU228.0 Timer 3 - actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU230.0 Timer 4 - actual value Word 0 .. 65535 r BU232.0 Reserved Byte40.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 ..

0xFFFFFFFF1 s r/w BU1

BU244.0 Int. motor operating

hours D-word 0 ..

0xFFFFFFFF1 s r BU1

BU248.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 ..

0xFFFFFFFF1 s r BU1

BU252.0 Number of starts D-word 0 ..

0xFFFFFFFFr/w BU1

BU256.0 Internal number of starts

rightD-word 0 ..

0xFFFFFFFFr BU1

BU260.0 Internal number of starts

leftD-word 0 ..

0xFFFFFFFFr BU1

BU264.0 Reserved Byte[12]

Table B-6: Data record 95 - diagnostics - statistics data



B.7 Data record 130 - base device parameter 1

Device configuration

Table B-7: Device configuration

Byte.Bit Device configuration Type Range Note Info

0.0 Device class Byte 5, 9 5 = BU19 = BU2

BU1 BU2BU2

1.0 Thermistor (Th) Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU BU1 BU2

1.1 Reserved Bit[7]

2.0 Operator panel (OP) Bit 0, 1 BU1 BU2

2.1 Analog module (AM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

2.2 Temperature module (TM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

2.3 Earth-fault modules (EM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

2.4 Digital module 1 (DM1) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 0 = no digital module1 = monostable2 = bistable

BU2

2.6 Digital module 2 (DM2) Bit[2] 0 .. 2 BU2

3.0 Reserved Bit[8]

4.0 Current measurement module (IM)

Bit[7] 0 .. 5 0 = no current measurement1 = 0.3 .. 3 A2 = 2.4 .. 25 A3 = 10 .. 100 A4 = 20 .. 200 A5 = 63 .. 630 A

BU1 BU2

4.7 Voltage measurement (UM) Bit 0, 1 BU2

5.0 Reserved

6.0 Control function (CF) 0x000x100x110x120x200x21

0x300x31

0x400x41

0x500x600x610x620x630x640x700x71

0x00 = overload0x10 = direct starter0x11 = reversing starter0x12 =linked switchgear0x20 = star-delta starter0x21 = star-delta starter with

reversal of the direction of rotation

0x30 = Dahlander0x31 = Dahlander with reversal

of the direction of rotation0x40 = pole-changing switch0x41 = pole-changing switch with

reversal of the direction ofrotation

0x50 = valve0x60 =slider 10x61 =slider 20x62 =slider 30x63 =slider 40x64 =slider 50x70 =soft starter0x71 =soft reversing starter

BU1 BU2BU1 BU2BU1 BU2BU1 BU2BU2BU2

BU2BU2

BU2BU2

BU2BU2BU2BU2BU2BU2BU2BU2

7.0 Reserved Bit[8]

SIMOCODE pro

B-16 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Base device parameter 1

Byte.Bit Specification Type Range Unit De-

fault

Note Info

0.0 Coordination Byte[4]

4.0 Device configuration

(see above) (12)Byte[8] BU1 BU2

12.0 Bit parameter (16)12.0 No configuration fault due to

OPBit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2

12.1 Start-up parameter block active

Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2

12.2 Test/reset buttons blocked Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2

12.3 Bus and PLC/DCS - reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = manual, 1 = automatic

BU1 BU2

12.4 Reserved Bit 0

12.5 Reserved Bit 0

12.6 Reserved Bit 0

12.7 Reserved Bit 0

13.0 Diagnostics for process signals

Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2

13.1 Diagnostics for process warnings

Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

13.2 Diagnostics forprocess faults

Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

13.3 Diagnostics fordevice faults

Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

13.4 Reserved Bit 0

13.5 Reserved Bit 0

13.6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

13.7 Monitoring PLC/DCS Bit 0, 1 1 BU1 BU2

14.0 Overload protection - type of load

Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase1 = 1-phase

14.1 Overload protection - reset Bit 0, 1 0 0 = manual, 1 = automatic

14.2 Reserved Bit 0

14.3 Save switching command Bit 0, 1 0

14.4 Non-maintained command mode

Bit 0, 1 0 CF<>0x00

14.5 Cold starting level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact

BU1 BU2

14.6 Load type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = motor, 1 = ohmic load

BU1 BU2

14.7 Reserved Bit 0

15.0 External fault 1 - type Bit 0, 1 0

0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact

BU1 BU2

15.1 External fault 2 - type Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2



Table B-8: Data record 130 - base device parameter 1



15.4 External fault 1 - effectiveness

Bit 0, 1 0 0 = always, 1 = only motor ON

BU1 BU2

15.5 External fault 2 -effectiveness

Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2


Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2


Bit 0, 1 0 BU1 BU2

16.0 Bit[2] parameters (20)16.0 Thermistor - overload

responseBit[2] 1, 2, 3 3 0 = deactivated

1 = signal2 = warn3 = switch off

Th

16.2 Thermistor - response to sen-sor error

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

2 Th

16.4 Internal earth fault - response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0

16.6 Motor protection - overload response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

3

17.0 Motor protection - overload response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2

17.2 Asymmetry protection - response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

2

17.4 Tripping response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0

17.6 Warning response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0

18.0 Tripping response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0

18.2 Warning response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0

18.4 Blocking protection - response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0

18.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0

19.0 Monitoring the number of starts - response to overshoo-ting

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 BU1 BU2

19.2 Monitoring the number of starts - response to pre-warning

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2

19.4 Monitoring operating hours - response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2

19.6 Monitoring stopped time - response

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU1 BU2

20.0 Ext. fault 1 - response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU1 BU2



fault

Note Info

Table B-8: Data record 130 - base device parameter 1 (cont.)

SIMOCODE pro

B-18 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02





21.2 Basic unit - debounce time inputs

Bit[2] 0 .. 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6 ms BU1 BU2

21.4 Timer 1 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 0 = with closing delay, 1 = closing delaywith memory, 2 = with OFF delay, 3 = with fleeting clo-sing

BU1 BU2

21.6 Timer 2 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 BU1 BU2

22.0 Signal conditioning 1 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0

0 = non-inverting1 = inverting2 = rising edge with memory3 = falling edge with memory

BU1 BU2


0 BU1 BU2

22.4 Non-volatile element 1 - type

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 BU1 BU2


Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 BU1 BU2

23.0 Reserved Bit[2] 0 BU1 BU2




24.0 Bit[4] parameter (24) BU1 BU2

24.0 External fault 1 - reset also by

Bit[4] 0 ... 1111B

1111B Bit[0] = panel reset,Bit[1] = automatic reset,Bit[2] = remote reset,Bit[3] = OFF com-mand reset

BU1 BU2


Bit[4] 0 ... 1111B

1111B BU1 BU2


Bit[4] 0 ... 1111B

1111B BU1 BU2


Bit[4] 0 ... 1111B

1111B BU1 BU2

26.0 Limit monitor - hysteresis for limit monitoring

Bit[4] 0 .. 15 1% 5 BU1 BU2




28.0 Byte parameters (28)28.0 Interner earth fault - delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5

29.0 Overload protection - class Byte 5, 10 .. 35, 40

10 BU1 BU2

30.0 Motor protection - delay with overload operation

Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5

31.0 Asymmetry protection -level

Byte 0 .. 100 1% 40

32.0 Asymmetry protection -delay

Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5


fault

Note Info




33.0 Interlocking time Byte 0 .. 255 1 s 0

34.0 F time Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 0 = deactivated

35.0 Tripping level I> Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0

36.0 Warning level I> Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0

37.0 Tripping level I< Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0

38.0 Warning level I< Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0

39.0 Blocking level Byte 0 .. 255 4% / Ie 0

40.0 Tripping delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5

41.0 Warning delay I> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5

42.0 Tripping delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5

43.0 Warning delay I< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5

44.0 Blocking delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5

45.0 Monitoring the number of starts - permitted starts

Byte 1 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

46.0 Reserved Byte 0


48.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - type Byte 0 .. 11111111B

0 BU1 BU2


0 BU1 BU2


0 BU1 BU2


52.0 Wort parameters (32)52.0 Motor protection - cooling

down timeWord 0 ..

65535100 ms 3000

54.0 Motor protection - pause time Word 0 .. 65535

100 ms 0 0 = deactivated

56.0 Run time Word 0 .. 65535

100 ms 10 0 = deactivated

58.0 Monitoring the number of starts - start time frame

Word 0 .. 65535

1 s 0 BU1 BU2

60.0 Monitoring the number of starts - interlocking time

Word 0 .. 65535

1 s 0 BU1 BU2

62.0 Stopped time level > Word 0 .. 65535

1 h 0 BU1 BU2

64.0 Timer 1 - limit value Word 0 .. 65535

100 ms 0 BU1 BU2


100 ms 0 BU1 BU2

68.0 Counter 1 - limit value Word 0 .. 65535

0 BU1 BU2


0 BU1 BU2


fault

Note Info


SIMOCODE pro

B-20 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Grayed fields: parameters can be changed while running.

72.0 Reserved Word 0


76.0 Part - D-word parameters (36)

76.0 Operator enables Bit[32] 0 .. 1..1B

0..0B

80.0 Overload protection -set current Ie1

D-word 0 .. 82000

10 mA 30

84.0 Motor operating hours level > D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF

1s 0 BU1 BU2

88.0 Reserved D-word 0


fault

Note Info




B.8 Data record 131 - base device parameter 2 (plug )

Byte.Bit Specification Type Range De-

fault

Note Info


4.0 Byte parameters (40)4.0 BU - output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

5.0 BU - output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

6.0 BU - output 3 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

7.0 Reserved Byte 0

8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP




12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 OP




16.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 105 Default: status - ON <

BU1 BU2

17.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.1 Byte 0 .. 255 106 Default: status - OFF

BU1 BU2

18.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.2 Byte 0 .. 255 107 Default: status - ON >

BU1 BU2

19.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.3 Byte 0 .. 255 128 Default: signal - overload operation

BU1 BU2

20.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.4 Byte 0 .. 255 110 Default: status - interlocking time active

BU1 BU2

21.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.5 Byte 0 .. 255 120 Default: status - automatic mode of operation

BU1 BU2

22.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.6 Byte 0 .. 255 96 Default: status - general fault

BU1 BU2

23.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 0.7 Byte 0 .. 255 97 Default: status - general warning

BU1 BU2

24.0 Cyclic signaling - bit 1.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2








32.0 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Table B-9: Data record 131 - base device parameter 2

SIMOCODE pro

B-22 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02
















48.0 Monitoring PLC/ DCS input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

49.0 Motor protection - emergency start Byte 0 .. 255 60 Default: Cyclic con-trolling - bit 0.4



52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 .. 255 61 Default: cyclic con-trolling - bit 0.5

BU1 BU2

53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 .. 255 2 Default: fixed level value‚ “1”

BU1 BU2

54.0 Control station - local control [LC] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0

55.0 Control station - local control [LC] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0

56.0 Control station - local control [LC] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0

57.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 40 Default: cyclic con-trolling - bit 0.0

58.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 41 Default: cyclic con-trolling - bit 0.1

59.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 42 Default: cyclic con-trolling - bit 0.2

60.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON < Byte 0 .. 255 0

61.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] OFF Byte 0 .. 255 0

62.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON > Byte 0 .. 255 0

63.0 Control station - operator panel [OP] ON <

Byte 0 .. 255 0

64.0 Control station - operator panel [OP] OFF

Byte 0 .. 255 0

65.0 Control station - operator panel [OP] ON >

Byte 0 .. 255 0


fault

Note Info




66.0 Control function - ON < Byte 0 .. 255 73 Default: general control station ON <

67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 .. 255 74 Default: general control station OFF

68.0 Control function - ON > Byte 0 .. 255 75 Default: general control station ON >

69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 .. 255 101 Default: status - motor current flo-wing

BU1 BU2

70.0 External fault 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2




74.0 External fault 1 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2




78.0 Cold starting (TPF) Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

79.0 Test 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 59 Default: cyclic con-trolling - bit 0.3

BU1 BU2

80.0 Test 2 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

81.0 Reset 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 62 Default: cyclic con-trolling - bit 0.6

BU1 BU2

82.0 Reset 2 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

83.0 Reset 3 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2





88.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - input 1

Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


fault

Note Info


SIMOCODE pro

B-24 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02



Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


98.0 Timer 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

99.0 Timer 1 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

100.0 Timer 2 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

101.0 Timer 2 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

102.0 Counter 1 - input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

103.0 Counter 1 - input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

104.0 Counter 1 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

105.0 Counter 2 - input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

106.0 Counter 2 - input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

107.0 Counter 2 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

108.0 Signal conditioning 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

109.0 Signal conditioning 1 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

110.0 Signal conditioning 2 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

111.0 Signal conditioning 2 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

112.0 Non-volatile element 1 - input

Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

113.0 Non-volatile element 1 - reset

Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2

116.0 Flashing 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2



119.0 Flickering 1 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU1 BU2



122.0 Analog parameters (44)122.0 PLC/DCS analog input Byte 0 .. 255 16 Default: max. cur-

rent I_maxBU1 BU2



fault

Note Info




B.9 Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1


fault

Note Info


4.0 Part - bit parameters (17)

4.0 3UF50 compatibility mode Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

4.1 3UF50 mode of operation Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0, 1 = DPV1

BU2

4.2 Reserved Bit 0

4.3 Reserved Bit 0

4.4 Reserved Bit 0

4.5 Reserved Bit 0

4.6 Reserved Bit 0

4.7 Reserved Bit 0

5.0 Reserved Bit 0

5.1 Reserved Bit 0

5.2 Reserved Bit 0

5.3 Reserved Bit 0

5.4 Analog module - measuring range input

Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 0..20 mA1 = 4-20 mA

AM

5.5 Analog module - measuring range output

Bit 0, 1 0 AM

5.6 Reserved Bit 0

5.7 Reserved Bit 0

6.0 Limit value 1 Overshooting/undershooting

Bit 0, 1 0 0 =“<” (overshooting)1 =“<” (undershoo-ting)

BU2


Bit 0, 1 0 BU2


Bit 0, 1 0 BU2


Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

6.4 Reserved Bit 0

6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact

BU2

6.6 Slider response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = closed, 1 = open

BU2

6.7 Reserved Bit 0

7.0 External fault 5 - type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact, 1 = NC contact

BU2

7.1 External fault 6 - type Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

7.2 Reserved Bit 0

7.3 Reserved Bit 0

7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = always1 = only motor ON

BU2

7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

Table B-10: Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1

SIMOCODE pro

B-26 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


7.6 Reserved Bit 0

7.7 Reserved Bit 0

8.0 Reserved Bit 0

8.1 Reserved Bit 0

8.2 Reserved Bit 0

8.3 Reserved Bit 0

8.4 Timestamping active Bit 0, 1 0 BU2

8.5 Reserved Bit 0

8.6 Reserved Bit 0

8.7 Reserved Bit 0

9.0 Reserved Bit 0

9.1 Reserved Bit 0

9.2 Reserved Bit 0

9.3 Reserved Bit 0

9.4 Reserved Bit 0

9.5 Reserved Bit 0

9.6 Reserved Bit 0

9.7 Reserved Bit 0

10.0 Bit[2] parameters

10.0 3UF50 base type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU2



10.6 UVO mode of operation Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = deactivated, 1 = activated

BU2

11.0 Monitoring tripping U< Bit[2] 1, 2 1 1 = on+ (always,not TPF)2 = run (Motor ON, not TPF)

UM

11.2 Monitoring warning U< Bit[2] 1, 2 1 UM



12.0 Monitoring Tripping 0/4-20 mA>

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 0 = on (always)1 = on+ (always, not TPF)2 = run (motor ON, not TPF)3 = run+ (motor ON, not TPF,

start hiding)

AM


fault

Note Info

Table B-10: Data record DS132 - extended device parameter 1 (cont.)



12.2 Monitoring warning 0/4-20 mA>

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 AM

12.4 Monitoring tripping 0/4-20 mA<

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 AM

12.6 Monitoring warning 0/4-20 mA<

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 AM

13.0 Monitoring limit value 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 BU2


0 BU2


0 BU2


0 BU2





15.0 DM - debounce time inputs Bit[2] 0 .. 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6ms DM1DM2

15.2 AM - response with a wire break

Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 20 = deactivated1 = signal2 = warn3 = switch off

AM

15.4 EM - response to an external earth fault

Bit[2] 1, 3 1 EM

15.6 Reserved Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 EM





17.0 TM - tripping response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 0 = deactivated1 = signal2 = warn3 = switch off

TM

17.2 TM - warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 TM

17.4 TM - response to a sensor error/ out of range

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

2 TM

17.6 TM - active sensor Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0: 1 sensor1: 2 sensor3: 3 sensor

TM


fault

Note Info


SIMOCODE pro

B-28 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


18.0 Tripping response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0

0 = deactivated1 = signal2 = warn3 = switch off

UM

18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

18.4 Tripping response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM

18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

19.0 Tripping response cosφ< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM

19.2 Warning response cosφ< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

19.4 Tripping response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM

19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM

20.0 Tripping response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM

20.2 Warning response 0/4-20 mA>

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM

20.4 Tripping response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM

20.6 Warning response 0/4-20 mA<

Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM





22.0 Ext. fault 5 - response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = deactivated1 = signal2 = warn3 = switch off

BU2

22.2 Ext. fault 6 - response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU2



23.0 Trace - trigger edge Bit[2] 0,1 0 0 = positive, 1 = negative BU2








25.0 Timer 3 type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 0 = with closing delay, 1 = closing delay with memory, 2 = with OFF delay, 3 = with fleeting clo-sing

BU2

25.2 Timer 4 - type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 BU2


0

0 = non-inverting1 = inverting2 = rising edge with memory 3 = falling edge with memory

BU2


0 BU2


Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 BU2


Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3

0 BU2


fault

Note Info










28.0 Bit[4] parameters (25)

28.0 TM - sensor type Bit[3]+Bit

000B ... 100B

000B 000B = PT100,001B = PT1000,010B = KTY83,011B = KTY84,100B = NTC

TM


29.0 External fault 5 -Reset also by

Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B

0101 Bit[0] = panel reset,Bit[1] = automatic reset,Bit[2] = remote reset,Bit[3] = OFF com-mand reset

BU2

29.4 External fault 6 -reset also by

Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B

1111B BU2





32.0 Truth table 7 2I/1O - type Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B

0 BU2

32.4 Truth table 8 2I/1O - type Bit[4] 0 .. 1111B

0 BU2



34.0 Hysteresis P - cos phi - U Bit[4] 0...15 0 1% UM

34.4 Hysteresis 0/4-20 mA Bit[4] 0...15 0 1% AM

35.0 Hysteresis free limit values Bit[4] 0...15 0 1% BU2


36.0 Byte parameters (29)


37.0 EM - delay Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 EM

38.0 Level tripping cosφ< Byte 0 .. 100 1% 0 UM

39.0 Warning level cosφ< Byte 0 .. 100 1% 0 UM

40.0 Tripping level U< Byte 0 .. 255 8 V 0 UM

41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 .. 255 8 V 0 UM

42.0 Tripping level 0/4-20 mA>

Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM

43.0 Warning level0/4-20 mA>

Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM


fault

Note Info


SIMOCODE pro

B-30 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


44.0 Tripping level0/4-20 mA<

Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM

45.0 Warning level0/4-20 mA<

Byte 0 .. 255 *128 0 AM

46.0 Tripping delay P> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

48.0 Tripping delay P< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

50.0 Tripping level cosφ< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

51.0 Warning delay cosφ< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

52.0 Tripping delay U< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 UM

54.0 Tripping delay 0/4-20 mA>

Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM

55.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM

56.0 Tripping delay 0/4-20 mA<

Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM

57.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 AM

58.0 Delay limit value 1 Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 5 BU2




62.0 TM - hysteresis Byte 0 .. 255 1K 5 TM

63.0 Maximum time for star opera-tion

Byte 0 .. 255 1s 20 CF = star-delta star-ter

64.0 UVO time Byte 0 .. 255 100 ms 0 BU2

65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 .. 255 1s 0 BU2

66.0 Trace-Pretrigger Byte 0 .. 20 5 % 0 BU2





0 BU2


0 BU2


0 BU2




76.0 Word parameters (33)


fault

Note Info




76.0 Analog module - start value output

Word 0 .. 65535

0 Value for 0/4 mA AM

78.0 Analog module - end value output

Word 0 .. 65535

27648 Value for 20 mA AM

80.0 TM - Tripping level T> Word 0 .. 65535

1 K 0 TM

82.0 TM - Warning response T> Word 0 .. 65535

1 K 0 TM

84.0 Limit monitor 1 - limit value Word 0 .. 65535

0 BU2


0 BU2


0 BU2


0 BU2


100 ms 0 BU2


100 ms 0 BU2


0 BU2


0 BU2

100.0 Pause time Word 0 .. 65535

10 ms 0

102.0 Reserved Word 0 ..65535

1 ms 100 BU2




fault

Note Info


SIMOCODE pro

B-32 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


Grayed fields: parameters can be changed while running.

108.0 Part - D-word parameters (37)

108.0 Overload protection -set current Ie2

D-word 0 .. 82000

10 mA 0

112.0 Tripping level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF

1 W 0 UM

116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF

1 W 0 UM

120.0 Tripping level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF

1 W 0 UM

124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0 .. 0xFFFFFFFF

1 W 0 UM

128.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O type - output 1

Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B

0 BU2

132.0 Truth table 9 5I/2O type - output 2

Bit [32] 0 .. 1..1B

0 BU2




fault

Note Info




B.10 Data record 133 - extended device parameter 2

(plug )


fault

Note Info


4.0 Byte parameter (41)

4.0 DM1 - output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1

5.0 DM1 - output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM1

6.0 DM2 - output 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2

7.0 DM2 - output 2 Byte 0 .. 255 0 DM2

8.0 Reserved Byte 0

9.0 Reserved Byte 0



12.0 Timestamping - input 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2










22.0 Control station - local control [LC] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0

23.0 Control station - local control [LC] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0

24.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0

25.0 Control station - PLC/DCS [DP] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0

26.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0

27.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0

28.0 Control station - operator panel [OP] ON>>

Byte 0 .. 255 0

29.0 Control station - operator panel [OP]<>/ <<>>

Byte 0 .. 255 0

30.0 Control function - ON<< Byte 0 .. 255 0

31.0 Control function - ON>> Byte 0 .. 255 0

32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 .. 255 0

33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 .. 255 0

34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 .. 255 0

35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 .. 255 0

36.0 External fault 5 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

37.0 External fault 6 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Table B-11: Data record 133 - extended device parameter

SIMOCODE pro

B-34 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02



40.0 External fault 5 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

41.0 External fault 6 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2



44.0 UVO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

45.0 OPO error Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

46.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O -input 1

Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

64.0 Timer 3 - input Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

65.0 Timer 3 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


67.0 Timer 4 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


fault

Note Info

Table B-11: Data record 133 - extended device parameter (cont.)



68.0 Counter 3 - input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

69.0 Counter 3 - input - Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

70.0 Counter 3 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

71.0 Counter 4 - input + Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


73.0 Counter 4 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

74.0 Signal conditioner 3 -input

Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

75.0 Signal conditioner 3 -reset

Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

76.0 Signal conditioner 4 -input

Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2

77.0 Signal conditioning 4 - reset Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2


Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2







88.0 Analog parameters (45)

88.0 Analog module - output Byte 0 .. 255 0 AM

89.0 Analog input limit value 1 Byte 0 .. 255 0 BU2





94.0 Trace - analog input Byte 0...255 0 BU2

95.0 PLC/DCS analog input 2 Byte 0...255 0 BU2






fault

Note Info

Table B-11: Data record 133 - extended device parameter (cont.)

SIMOCODE pro

B-36 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


B.11 Data record 139 - labeling

The diagnostics • External fault 1 to 6 (signals, warnings and faults)• Limit value 1 to 4 (signals), • TM warning T>/ tripping T> (signals, warnings and faults) • Warning/ tripping 0/4-20 mA<> (signals, warnings and faults)

can be parameterized to have various meanings e.g. fill level >, stock hot etc. To simplify the diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These can be created, read out and displayed with SIMOCODE ES, for example. The texts have no functionality.

Byte.Bit Specification Type Information



10.0 Labeling - external fault 1 Byte[10] BU1 BU2




50.0 Labeling - external fault 5 Byte[10] BU2

60.0 Labeling - external fault 6 Byte[10] BU2



90.0 Labeling limit value 1 Byte[10] BU2




130.0 Labeling TM warning T> Byte[10] BU2

140.0 Labeling TM tripping T> Byte[10] BU2

150.0 Labeling warning 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2

160.0 Labeling warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2

170.0 Labeling tripping 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2

180.0 Labeling tripping 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2


Table B-12: Data record 139 - labeling



B.12 Data record 160 - communication parameters

Attention

Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is recognized automa-tically. The current baud rate is read.

B.13 Data record 165 - comment

Byte Specification Info

0.0 Coordination

BU1BU2

4.0 Station address

5.0 Baud rate

6.0 to 11.0 Reserved

Table B-13: Data record 160 - communication parameters

Byte.Bit Specification Type Info


BU1BU2

4.0 System designation Byte[32]

36.0 Location identification Byte[22]

58.0 Date Byte[16]


112.0 Comment Byte[54]

Table B-14: Data record 165 - comment

SIMOCODE pro

B-38 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


B.14 Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling

Description

The acylic control data can be used for any functions. The control data is available as device-internal outputs (sockets).



BU1BU2

4.0 Acyclic controlling - bit 0.0 Bit
















6.0 Acyclic controlling - analog value Word

Table B-15: Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling



B.15 Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling

Description

Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic signaling data. The control data is available as device-internal inputs (plugs).


0.0 Acyclic signaling - bit 0.0 Bit

BU1BU2
















Table B-16: Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling

SIMOCODE pro

B-40 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


B.16 Data record 224 - password protection

Description

• Password protection onIf the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is activated and the password is accepted. If, at the time of receiving, “pass-word protection on” and the password are not the same, the signal “signal - password false” is set and no change is carried out.

• Password protection offIf the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is deactivated. If the password is false, the signal “signal - password false” is set and no change is carried out.



BU1BU2

4 Control flag:0 = password protection off1 = password protection on

Bit

4.1 Reserved Bit[31]

8.0 Password Byte[8]


Table B-17: Data record 224 - password protection



SIMOCODE pro

B-42 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Dimension Drawings CIn this chapter

This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the SIMOCODE pro system components.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators• technicians.

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• good knowledge about configuring switchgear.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 C-1

Dimension Drawings

C.1 3UF70 basic unit

C.1.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7 000 basic unit

C.1.2 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7 010 basic unit

865 36

80 106

125

445

80 106

125

45115

5 654

SIMOCODE pro

C-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Dimension Drawings

C.2 3UF710 current measurement module

C.2.1 Current measurement module (push-through converter)

3UF7 100, 0.3 A to 3 A,

3UF7 101, 2.4 A up to 25 A

45 405

8438

T1 T3

8

T2


Dimension Drawings


3UF7 102, 10 A to 100 A

55 67

94

65

14

5

T1

T2

T3

SIMOCODE pro

C-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Dimension Drawings


3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A

120

95

79 95

5 140

78

25

7


Dimension Drawings

C.2.4 Current measurement module (rail connection)

3UF7 103, 20 A to 200 A

120

9537 17

9

79 95 119

7 47140

5

84

SIMOCODE pro

C-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Dimension Drawings

C.2.5 Current measurement module (rail connection)

3UF7 104, 63 A to 630 A

145

57

255011

985 12

214

7

125

6148

60.5

60.5

6


Dimension Drawings

C

C.3 3UF7 200 operator panel

29

8 29 796

36

SIMOCODE pro

-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Dimension Drawings

C.4 3UF7 3 digital module

1155 4

1068

92

22.5


Dimension Drawings

C.5 Accessories

C.5.1 Door adapter

38.2

45.5

17.4

SIMOCODE pro

C-10 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Technical Data DIn this chapter

This chapter contains the technical data about SIMOCODE pro.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• configurators

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• good knowledge about configuring switchgear• good knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 D-1

Technical Data

D.1 Common technical data

Permiss. envir. temperature

In operation -25 ... +60 °C

during storage and transport -40 ... +80 °C

Site height above sea level

< 2000 m

< 3000 m max. +50 °C (no safe isolation)

< 4000 m max. +40 °C (no safe isolation)

Degree of protection (according

to 60529)

all components (except current measurement module, rail connec-tion, operator panel and door adap-ter)

IP20

Current measurement module withrail connection

IP00

Operator panel (front) and door adapter (front) with cover

IP54

Shock resistance (sine pulse) 15 g/11 ms

Installation location Arbitrary

Frequencies 50/60 Hz ± 5%

EMC stability

according to IEC 60947-1

corresponds to degree of severity 3

Conducted interference-signal injec-tion, burst according to IEC 61000-4-4

2 kV (power ports) over-voltage limitter

is required for inductive loads.

1 kV (signal ports)

Conducted interference signal injec-tion, burst according to IEC 61000-4-5

2 kV (line to earth)1 kV (line to earth)

Electrostatic discharging,ESD according to IEC 61000-4-2

8 kV (air discharge)6 kV (contact discharge)

Field-related interference signal according to IEC 61000-4-3

10 V/m

EMC emitted interference


correponds to degree of severity A

This is a Class A product. This product can

cause radio interference if used in a dome-

stic environment. The user must provide

suitable countermeasures if required.

Conducted and emittedinterference

DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)

Safe isolation


All circuits in SIMOCODE pro are isolated from each other according to IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double cree-page distance and air gap.

Follow the information contained in “Test report” no. 2668

SIMOCODE pro

D-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Technical Data

D.2 Basic units

Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rails orScrew attachment using additional push-in lugs

Display

• Red/green “DEVICE” LED Green: “Ready for operation”Red: “Function test was negative, device is locked”Off: “No control supply voltage”

• Green “BUS” LED Continuous light:“Communication with PLC/DCS”Flashing: “Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/pro-gramming device”

• Red “GEN. FAULT” LED Continuous light/flashing: “Feeder fault”, e.g. overload tripping

“Test/reset” button •Resetting the device after tripping•Function test (system self-test)•Operation of memory module, addressing plug

System interfaces

• Front Connecting an operator panel or expansion module. In addition, the memory module, addressing plug or a PC cable for parame-terization can be connected to the system interface

• Underside: Connecting a current measurement module

PROFIBUS DP interface

• Interface design• Connection

RS4859-pole SUB-D socket (12 MBit)Terminals (1.5 MBit) connection cross section like control circuitConnecting a PROFIBUC DP cable using the cable connection or the 9-pole SUB-D socket

Rated control voltage Us (accor-ding to DIN EN 61131-2)

110 - 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz 24 V DC

Operating range 0.85 to 1.1 x Us 0.8 to 1.2 x Us

Power consumption

• Basic unit 1 (3UF7000) 7 VA 5 W

• Basic unit 2 (3UF7010)(including two expansion modules connected to basic unit 2)

10 VA 7 W

Rated isolation voltage Ui 300 V (for degree of pollution 3)

Rated surge voltage strength

Uimp

4 kV


Technical Data

Relay outputs:

• Number 3 monostable relay outputs

• Auxiliary contacts of the 3 relay outputs

The isolated NO contacts, of which 2 relay outputs have a com-mon root and one is separate, can be freely assigned to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or signaling of an operating state). (NC contact response can be parameteri-zed via internal signal conditioning).

• Predefined short-circuit protection for auxiliary contacts (relay out-puts)

•Fast fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)

•1.6 A, C-characteristic circuit breaker(IEC 60947-5-1)

•6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A) circuit breaker

• Rated uninterrupted current 6 A

• Rated switching capacity AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC

6 A / 120 V AC

3 A / 230 V AC

DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC

0.55 A / 60 V DC

0.25 A / 125 V DC

Inputs (binary) The 4 inputs with a common root, that are supplied via the device electronics (24 V DC), for measuring process signals (e.g. local control, key-operated switch, end position switch, ...), can be freely assigned to the control functions.

• 24 V DCCable lengthsInput characteristic curve

300 mType 1 according to EN 61131-2

Thermistor motor protection

(binary PTC)

• Total cold resistance < 1.5 kOhm

• Response value 3.4 to 3.8 kOhm

• Return value 1.5 to 1.65 kOhm

• Cable lengths Cross-section:2.5 mm2

1.5 mm2

0.5 mm2

Lengths:2x250 m2x150 m2x50 m

Connection cross-sections

• Tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm

• solid 1 x (0.5 to 4.0); 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm2

• stranded, with end sleeves 1 x (0.5 to 2.5); 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2

• AWG cable 2 x 20 to 14

SIMOCODE pro

D-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Technical Data

D.3 Current measurement modules

Mounting

• Set current Ie = 0.3 to 3 A;2.4 to 25 A; 10 to 100 A (3UF7100, 3UF7101, 3UF7102)

Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rails or screw attach-ment via additional plug-in lugs

• Set current Ie = 20 to 200 A(3UF7103)

Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rails, screw attach-ment onto mounting plates or directly to the contactor

• Set current Ie = 63 to 630 A(3UF7104)

Screw attachment onto the mounting plate or directly onto the contactor

System interfaces For connection to a basic unit

Set current Ie 3UF7100; 3UF7101; 3UF7102 3UF7103; 3UF7104

0.3 to 3 A; 2.4 to 25 A; 10 to 100 A

20 to 200 A; 63 to 630 A

• Rated isolation voltage Ui (for degree of pollution 3)

690 V 1000 V

• Rated surge voltage strength Uimp

6 kV 8 kV

• Measurement frequency 50/60 Hz

• Type of current three-phase current

• Short-circuit Additional short-circuit protection in main circuitrequired1)

• Accuracy of the current measure-ment

(in the range 1x the minimum setting current Iu to 8x the maxi-mum set current Io) +/- 3 %

Push-through opening Diameter

• Set current 0.3 to 3 A;2.4 to 25 A:

7.5 mm

• Set current 10 to 100 A; 14.0 mm

• Set current 20 to 200 A; 25.0 mm

Rail connection 2)

• Set current Ie 20 to 200 A 63 to 630 A

• Connection screw M8x20 M10x30

• Tightening torque 10 to 14 Nm 14 to 24 Nm

• solid with cable lug 16 to 95 mm2 3) 50 to 240 mm2 4)

• multiple wire with cable lug 25 to 120 mm2 3) 70 to 240 mm2 4)

• AWG cable 6 to 3/0 kcmil 1/0 to 500 kcmil

1) More informationen under http://www.siemens.de/simocode and section D.6 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V on page D-8.

2) Screw connection is possible with a suitable box terminal 3RT19.

3) The 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs to cables with a cross-section larger than 95 mm2, according to DIN 46235.

4) The 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain the phase separation when connecting cable lugs to cables with a cross-section larger than 240 mm2, according to DIN 46234, and to cables larger than 185 mm2 according to DIN 46235.


http://www.siemens.de/simocode



Technical Data

D.4 Expansion modules (digital modules)

Mounting Snap-on mounting onto 35 mm standard rail orscrew attachment via additional plug-in lugs

Display

• Green “READY” LED Continuous light:“Ready for operation”

Flashing: “No connection to basic unit”

System interfaces For connecting a basic unit or expansion module

Rated isolation current Ui 300 V (for degree of pollution 3)

Rated surge voltage strength

Uimp

4 kV

Relay outputs:

• Number 2 mono or bistable relay outputs (depending on type)

• Auxiliary contacts of the2 relay outputs

The isolated NO contacts of all relay outputs with a common root can be freely assigned to control functions (e.g. network, star or delta contactor or signaling of an operating state). (NC contact response can be parameterized via internal signal conditioning).

• Predefined short-circuit protec-tion for auxiliary contacts (relay outputs)

Fast fuse link, operating class gL/gG 6 A, 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)1.6 A, C-characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1) circuit breaker6 A, C-characteristic (Ik < 500 A) circuit breaker

Rated uninterrupted current 6 A

Rated switching capacity

• AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC

6 A / 120 V AC

3 A / 230 V AC

• DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC

0.55 A / 60 V DC

0.25 A / 125 V DC

Inputs (binary) The 4 externally powered inputs (DC 24 V or 110-240 V AC/DC), have inputs with a common root dependant on their type. They are used for measuring process signals (e.g. local control, key-operated switches, end position switches, ...) and can be freely assigned to the control functions.

• 24 V DCCable lengthsInput characteristic curve

300 mType 2 according to EN 61131-2

• 110 V up to 240 V AC/DCCable lengthsInput characteristic curve

200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF/km)—

SIMOCODE pro

D-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Technical Data

D.5 Operator panel

Connection cross-sections

Tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm

• solid 1 x (0.5 to 4.0); 2 x (0.5 to 2.5) mm2

• stranded, with end sleeves 1 x (0.5 to 2.5); 2 x (0.5 to 1.5) mm2

• AWG cable 2 x 20 to 14

Mounting Installing in a switching-cabinet door and/or in a front panel, with system interface covering IP 54

Display

• Red/green “DEVICE” LED Green: “Ready for operation”Green, flashing:“No connection to basic unit”Red: “Function test was negative, device is locked”Off: “No control supply voltage”

• Green “BUS” LED Continuous light: “Communication with PLC/DCS”Flashing: “Baud rate recognized / communication with

PC/programming device”

• Red “GEN. FAULT” LED Continuous light/flashing: “Feeder fault”,e.g. overload tripping

• 3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs Can be freely assigned to any status signal

Buttons

• Test/reset •Resetting the device after tripping•Function test (system self-test)•Operation of memory module, addressing plug

• Operation buttons •For controlling the motor feeder, freely assignable

System interfaces

• Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug or a PC cable for parameterization

• Rear side Connection to the basic unit or an expansion module


Technical Data

D.6 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for

short-circuit currents up to 50 kA and 690 V

Sta

tus:

05/

01/2

069

0VSh

ort-c

ircui

t pro

tect

ion

with

fuse

s fo

r mot

or fe

eder

s.

Fast

fuse l

inks 3)

desi

gned

for s

hort

-circ

uit c

urre

nts

up to

50

kA a

nd 6

90 V

NHTy

pe 3N

A

for 3

UF7

DIAZ

EDTy

pe 5S

B

NEOZ

EDTy

pe 5S

E

Over

load r

elay

Con

tact

orC

LASS

Oper

ating

clas

s Se

tting r

ange

5 u.10

1520

2530

3540

gL(g

G)(T

ype)

Rated

oper

ating

curre

nt Ie/

AC-3

in A

for

Test

cur

rent

"r"

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/

690V

400V

/50

0V/

690V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

400V

/50

0V/6

90V

12

0.3

- 3.0

A3R

T101

53,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3520

3RT1

016

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,03,0

/3,0

/3,0

3,0/

3,0/

3,035

20

2.4

- 25A

3RT1

015

7,0/

5,0/

4,07,0

/5,0

/4,0

7,0/

5,0/

4,07,0

/5,0

/4,0

7,0/

5,0/

4,07,0

/5,0

/4,0

7,0/

5,0/

4,035

203R

T101

69,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

5,29,0

/6,5

/5,2

8,5/

6,55,2

3520

3RT1

017

12,0

/9,0

/6,3

11,0

/9,0

/6,3

10,0

/9,0

/6,3

9,5/

9,0/

6,39,0

/9,0

/6,3

9,0/

9,0/

6,38,5

/8,5

/6,3

3520

3RT1

023

9,0/

6,5/

5,29,0

/6,5

/5,2

9,0/

6,5/

5,263

253R

T102

412

,0/

12,0

/9,0

12,0

/12

,0/

9,012

,0/

12,0

/9,0

12,0

/12

,0/

9,012

,0/

12,0

/9,0

12,0

/12

,0/

9,012

,0/

12,0

/9,0

6325

3RT1

025

17,0

/17

,0/

13,0

17,0

/17

,0/

13,0

16,0

/16

,0/

13,0

15,0

/15

,0/

13,0

14,0

/14

,0/

13,0

13,0

/13

,0/

13,0

12,0

/12

,0/

12,0

6325

3RT1

026

25,0

/18

,0/

13,0

18,0

/18

,0/

13,0

16,0

/16

,0/

13,0

15,0

/15

,0/

13,0

14,0

/14

,0/

13,0

13,0

/13

,0/

13,0

12,0

/12

,0/

12,0

100

353R

T103

425

,0/

25,0

/20

,025

,0/

25,0

/20

,022

,3/

22,3

/20

,020

,3/

20,3

/20

,319

,1/

19,1

/19

,117

,6/

17,6

/17

,616

,1/

16,1

/16

,112

563

3RT1

035

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

23,5

/23

,5/

23,5

125

63

10-1

00A

3RT1

034

32,0

/32

,0/

20,0

25,5

/25

,5/

20,0

22,3

/22

,3/

20,0

20,3

/20

,3/

20,0

19,1

/19

,1/

19,1

17,6

/17

,6/

17,6

16,1

/16

,1/

16,1

125

633R

T103

540

,0/

40,0

/24

,033

,0/

33,0

/24

,029

,4/

29,4

/24

,028

,0/

28,0

/24

,026

,5/

26,5

/24

,025

,0/

25,0

/24

,023

,5/

23,5

/23

,512

563

3RT1

036

50,0

/50

,0/

24,0

38,5

/38

,5/

24,0

32,7

/32

,7/

24,0

29,4

/29

,4/

24,0

26,5

/26

,5/

24,0

25,0

/25

,0/

24,0

23,5

/23

,5/

23,5

160

803R

T104

465

,0/

65,0

/47

,056

,0/

56,0

/47

,049

,0/

49,0

/47

,045

,0/

45,0

/45

,041

,7/

41,7

/41

,738

,2/

38,2

/38

,234

,5/

34,5

/34

,520

012

53R

T104

580

,0/

80,0

/58

,061

,0/

61,0

/58

,053

,0/

53,0

/53

,047

,0/

47,0

/47

,045

,0/

45,0

/45

,043

,0/

43,0

/43

,040

,0/

40,0

/40

,020

016

03R

T104

695

,0/

95,0

/58

,069

,0/

69,0

/58

,059

,0/

59,0

/58

,053

,0/

53,0

/53

,050

,0/

50,0

/50

,047

,0/

47,0

/47

,044

,0/

44,0

/44

,020

016

03R

T105

410

0,0/

100,0

/10

0,093

,2/

93,2

/93

,281

,7/

81,7

/81

,774

,8/

74,8

/74

,869

,0/

69,0

/69

,063

,0/

63,0

/63

,057

,0/

57,0

/57

,035

531

53R

T105

510

0,0/

100,0

/10

0,010

0,0/

100,0

/10

0,097

,5/

97,5

/97

,590

,0/

90,0

/90

,082

,0/

82,0

/82

,074

,0/

74,0

/74

,035

531

5

20-2

00A

3RT1

054

115,0

/11

5,0/

115,0

93,2

/93

,2/

93,2

81,7

/81

,7/

81,7

74,8

/74

,8/

74,8

69,0

/69

,0/

69,0

64,0

/64

,0/

64,0

355

315

3RT1

055

150

/15

0/

150

122

/12

2/

122

107

/10

7/

107

98/

98/

9890

/90

/90

82/

82/

8274

/74

/74

355

315

3RT1

056

185

/18

5/

170

150

/15

0/

150

131

/13

1/

131

120

/12

0/

120

111

/11

1/

111

102

/10

2/

102

93/

93/

9335

531

5

63-6

30A

3RT1

064

225

/22

5/

225

182

/18

2/

182

160

/16

0/

160

146

/14

6/

146

135

/13

5/

135

126

/12

6/

126

500

400

3RT1

065

265

/26

5/

265

215

/21

5/

215

188

/18

8/

188

172

/17

2/

172

159

/15

9/

159

146

/14

6/

146

133

/13

3/

133

500

400

3RT1

066

300

/30

0/

280

243

/24

3/

243

213

/21

3/

213

195

/19

5/

195

180

/18

0/

180

165

/16

5/

165

150

/15

0/

150

500

400

3RT1

075

400

/40

0/

400

324

/32

4/

324

284

/28

4/

284

260

/26

0/

260

240

/24

0/

240

220

/22

0/

220

200

/20

0/

200

630

400

3RT1

076

500

/50

0/

450

405

/40

5/

405

355

/35

5/

355

325

/32

5/

325

300

/30

0/

300

275

/27

5/

275

250

/25

0/

250

630

500

3RT1

264

225

/22

5/

225

225

/22

5/

225

225

/22

5/

225

194

/19

4/

194

173

/17

3/

173

152

/15

2/

152

131

/13

1/

131

500

500

3RT1

265

265

/26

5/

265

265

/26

5/

265

265

/26

5/

265

228

/22

8/

228

204

/20

4/

204

180

/18

0/

180

156

/15

6/

156

500

500

3RT1

266

300

/30

0/

300

300

/30

0/

300

300

/30

0/

300

258

/25

8/

258

231

/23

1/

231

204

/20

4/

204

177

/17

7/

177

500

500

3RT1

275

400

/40

0/

400

400

/40

0/

400

400

/40

0/

400

344

/34

4/

344

316

/31

6/

316

800

800

3RT1

276

500

/50

0/

500

500

/50

0/

500

500

/50

0/

500

430

/43

0/

430

385

/38

5/

385

340

/34

0/

340

316

/31

6/

316

800

800

3TF6

8 2)

63

0/

630

/63

050

2/

502

/50

244

0/

440

/44

040

8/

408

/40

837

6/

376

/37

634

4/

344

/34

431

7/

317

/31

780

050

04)

3TF6

9 2)

63

0/

630

/63

063

0/

630

/63

057

2/

572

/57

253

1/

531

/53

150

0/

500

/50

046

9/

469

/46

943

8/

438

/43

880

063

04)

1) C

onta

ctor

inst

alla

tion

poss

ible

(afte

r dis

conn

ectin

g th

e bo

x te

rmin

al b

lock

)5)

Ass

ignm

ent a

nd s

hort-

circ

uit u

nits

acc

ordi

ng to

IEC

6094

7-4-

1.2)

No

cont

acto

r ins

talla

tion

poss

ible

Ty

pe o

f ass

ignm

ent "

1" :

Sco

ntacto

r or s

tarter

mus

t not

dama

ge pe

ople

or th

e plan

t if a

shor

t-circ

uit oc

curs.

3)

Adh

ere

to th

e op

erat

ing

volta

ge

It d

oes n

ot ne

ed to

be po

ssibl

e to c

ontin

ue op

erati

ng w

ithou

t rep

airs o

r rep

lacem

ent p

arts.

4) E

nsur

e tha

t the s

afety

sepa

ratio

n betw

een t

he m

axim

um A

C-3 o

pera

tingc

urre

nt an

d the

rated

fuse

curre

nt is

suffic

iently

larg

e.Ty

pe o

f ass

ignm

ent

"2"

: Co

ntacto

r or s

tarter

mus

t not

dama

ge pe

ople

or th

e plan

t if a

shor

t-circ

uit oc

curs.

and m

ust b

e rea

dy fo

r fur

ther u

se. T

he da

nger

of co

ntact

weldi

ng is

give

n.

Type

of as

signm

ent 5)

SIMOCODE pro

D-8 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Index

Numerics Comment 10-20

SIMOCODE pro

9-pole SUB-D connection 11-16

A

Abbreviations and Specifications A-3, B-3Accessories 1-18, 1-25Active control stations A-2Acyclic

writing 10-5writing and reading of data records 10-10

Addressing plug 1-18, 1-20, 1-25, 2-11,11-14, 12-4

Alarms 10-19Analog input 1-24Analog module 1-2, 1-17, 1-23, 1-24Analog output 1-24Asymmetry limit 3-9Asymmetry monitoring 3-9Asymmetry protection 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 3-9

B

Basic device parameter 10-20basic factory default settings 2-2, 12-2Basic unit pin assignment 11-7Basic units 1-10, 1-19Blocking limit 3-10Blocking protection 3-2, 3-3, 3-10Bus termination module 11-17Buttons D-7Byte arrangements B-2

C

Cable cross-section 11-6Cable lengths D-4Channel-related diagnostics 10-18Checklist for selecting the device

series 1-8Circuit breaker 1-12, 1-19, 4-12, 4-22, 4-23Class 1 master 10-2Class 2 master 10-2Class interval 3-10Clockwise rotation 4-28Color-coding on the connecting cable

11-13, 11-15

Commissioning 2-9, 12-1, 12-2, 12-3Communication 1-13, 10-1Communication parameters 10-20Communication principle 10-4Configuration with SIMOCODE pro V

11-11Configuring

a Reversing Starter 2-1SIMOCODE pro 10-6the slave diagnostics 10-12with a GSD file 10-6with SIMATIC PDM 10-8with the SIMOCODE ES software 10-8

Connecting cable 1-18, 1-25Connecting plugs with sockets 1-28Connecting SIMOCODE pro as a norm

slave with a GSD file 10-6Connection cross-sections D-4Contactor controls 2-7, A-2Control commands 4-1, 4-25, 4-28, 4-32,

4-38, 4-41, 4-51Control data from PROFIBUS DP 1-27Control function 1-12, 4-1, 4-2, 4-10Control programs 1-2Control station

- local control 4-3- operator panel 4-4- PC 4-4- PLC/DCS 4-3

Control stations 4-1Cooling down time 1-14Cooling time 3-7Cos phi 1-22Counter-clockwise rotation 4-28Counters 1-15, 9-2, 9-8Cover for IP54 1-20Covering 11-14Current limit 1-11, 3-10Current measurement modules 1-16,

1-21, 11-9, D-5Current measurement with current measu-

rement modules 11-9Current transformer 3-4

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 Index-1

Index

Current/voltage measurement module1-2, 1-16, 1-22

Cycliccontrolling 10-9services 1-13signaling 10-9signaling data 2-12data transfer 10-5

D

Dahlander 1-12, 4-12, 4-32 to 4-34Dahlander circuit 4-33Dahlander

with reversal of the direction of rotation 4-12, 4-35, 4-36, 4-37, 4-43,4-50

Data Formats and Data Records B-1Data record 130 - base device

parameter 1 B-16Data record 131 - base device

parameter 2 B-22Data record 133 - extended device

parameter 2 B-34Data record 139 - labeling B-37Data record 160 - communication

parameters B-38Data record 165 - comment B-38Data record 202 - Acyclic controlling B-39Data record 203 - Acyclic signaling B-40Data record 224 - password protection

B-41Data record 67 B-4Data record 67 - process image of the

outputs B-4Data record 69 - process image of the

inputs B-5Data record 92 - device diagnostics B-6Data record 94 - measured values B-14Data record 95 - Service/statistics

data B-15Data record DS132 - extended device para-

meter 1 B-26Data records - overview 10-20, B-1Data records (acyclic data) 10-10Degree of protection

(according to 60529) D-2Delay pre-warning 3-8Detachable terminals 11-2

for basic units and expansion modules 11-6

Device diagnostics 10-20Device series 1-2Diagnostic alarm 10-19Diagnostic data 1-14Diagnostics with STEP 7 10-11Digital module pin assignment 11-8

Digital modules 1-17, 1-23Dimension Drawings C-1Direct starter 1-4, 1-5, 1-12, 4-12, 4-17Display D-3, D-6, D-7Display and statistics data 10-20Door adapter 1-18, 1-25DP master 10-2DPV1 slave 10-2

E

Earth-fault detection 1-2Earth-fault module 1-11, 1-17, 1-23, 1-24Earth-fault monitoring 1-10, 1-17, 1-24EEx e applications 3-6, 3-12EMC emitted interference according to

IEC 60947-1 D-2EMC stability according to

IEC 60947-1 D-2Emergency start 1-13Enabled control command 4-31, 4-45,

4-55Enables 4-1, 4-8End position 4-45Error types 10-18Execution time 4-14, 4-40, 4-45, 4-52Expansion modules 1-23, D-6Extended device parameter 10-20

F

Fault feedback 4-14Feedback ON 4-13, 4-14, 4-41Feedback time 4-14, 4-40, 4-52Fill level 1-6Fixing lugs for screw attachments 11-2Flashing 1-15, 9-2, 9-19Flickering 1-15, 9-2, 9-20Free acyclic

control data 10-20signaling data 10-20

Function blocks 1-27

G

GSD (device data) 10-2GSD file 1-26, 10-6, 10-7

I

Identification-related diagnostics 10-16Independent operation 1-3Input characteristic curve D-4Inputs (binary) D-6Installation guidelines for the

PROFIBUS D 11-17Installation location D-2Integrating the GSD file into the configura-

tion software 10-7Integration in STEP7 10-8Interfaces 11-1

SIMOCODE pro

Index-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-02

Index

SIMOCODE pro

Interlocking time 4-13, 4-14, 4-19

K

Key-operated switch operation 4-5

L

Labeling 10-20Lamp controls A-2Local control 2-8Left - fast 4-35Left - slow 4-35Limit monitor 1-15, 9-2, 9-21, 9-23Limit overshooting 9-21Limit temperature 3-11Limit undershooting 9-21Linking function blocks 2-7Load type 3-8, 4-13, 4-40, 4-52Local 4-5, 4-6Local control station 2-2, 2-3, 2-9Locking the contactor 4-13Logic Modules 1-15, 9-1

M

Making internal assignments 4-51, 4-54Manual operation 4-5Manufacturer's identification 10-15Master PROFIBUS address 10-15Measured values 10-20Measurement frequency D-5Measurement module D-3Memory module 1-18, 1-20, 1-25, 11-14Mode selectors 4-5, 4-6Modes of operation 4-1, 4-6Monitoring 1-10Monitoring

active power 1-11analog signals 1-11PLC/DCS 1-13temperature 1-17the power factor (cos phi) 1-11

Motor control functions 1-19Motor feeder 1-4, 1-5, 2-3Motor operating hours 1-14Motor power/cos phi 1-14Motor protection functions 3-2Motor stop times 1-14Motor switching state 1-14Motor temperature 1-10, 1-14Mounting 11-1, D-3, D-5, D-6, D-7mounting lugs 11-2, 11-3, 11-4Mounting

the basic units and expansion modules 11-3the current measurementmodules 11-4the operator panel 11-5

Mounting, Wiring and Interfaces 11-1

N

Network contactor, clockwise rotation4-28

Non-maintained command mode 4-13, 4-40, 4-45, 4-52

Non-volatile elements 1-15, 9-2, 9-16NOR function 9-15, 9-18Norm diagnostics 10-5, 10-9Notes on parameterizing 12-2Number

of motor starts 1-14of overload trippings 1-14of start-ups 1-12

O

Object Manager OM SIMOCODE pro1-18, 1-26, 10-2, 10-8

OM SIMOCODE ES Professional 10-10ON control command 4-45Operating data 1-14Operating hours 1-12Operating range D-3Operational protection off (OPO) 1-13Operator enable of the individual control

stations 4-7Operator panel 1-16, 1-20, 11-14, D-7Overload 3-6Overload protection 1-10, 3-1, 3-2 to 3-4,

3-10Overload relay 1-12, 4-12, 4-16Overview of system components 1-16

P

Parameter block 10-8Parameter dependences in the GSD 10-7Parameterization 2-7parameterization software 1-26Parameterization starting 10-5Password protection 10-20Pause time 3-7PC cable 1-18, 1-25, 11-14PCS 7 library SIMOCODE pro 1-26Phase asymmetry 1-10, 1-14, 3-9Phase currents 1-14Phase cycle 1-14, 1-22Phase failure 1-10Phase voltages 1-14Pin assignment 11-7, 11-8Pin cross-section 11-9PLC/DCS 4-5Plugs (analog) 1-27Plugs (digital) 1-27Pole-changing switches 1-12, 1-19, 4-12,

4-38, 4-39with reversal of the direction of rotation 4-12, 4-41, 4-42

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 Index-3

Index

Power consumption D-3Power failure monitoring (UVO) 1-13Preventive maintenance 12-6Pre-warning 3-8Process alarm 10-19Process and diagnostic alarm 10-5, 10-9Process image (cyclic data) 10-10Process image

of the inputs 10-20of the outputs 10-20

Process monitoring 1-11PROFIBUS DP 1-13, 1-18, 2-2, 4-51, 4-53,

10-2PROFIBUS DP

interface 1-13, D-3on a 9-pole SUB-D socket 11-16

PROFIBUS DPV1 10-2PTC 3-11Pump 1-11Push-through opening 11-9, D-5Push-through system 1-16, 11-9

R

Rail connection 11-9, D-5Rail mounting 11-4Rated

control voltage D-3isolation current D-6isolation voltage D-3, D-5surge voltage strength D-3, D-5, D-6switching capacity D-6uninterrupted current D-6

Reading data 10-3Reading out

statistic data 12-6the diagnostics 10-11the statistics data 12-6

Relay outputs D-4, D-6Remote operation 4-5Remote/automatic 4-5Replacing a basic unit 12-9Replacing expansion units 12-9Reset 1-13, 3-8Responses 3-3Reversing Starter 1-12, 2-2, 4-8, 4-12,

4-19, 4-20Right - fast 4-35Right - slow 4-35

S

Save switching command 4-13Saving parameters

from a SIMOCODE ES file to abasic unit 12-8from the basic unit in aSIMOCODE ES file 12-7

from the basic unit in the memory module 12-7from the memory module in the basic unit 12-8

Screw attachment 11-2 to 11-4Screw terminals 1-27Sensor circuit error 3-12Sensor measuring circuits 1-11Sensors 1-17, 1-24Sequence

for connecting the system interface11-13, 11-15for PROFIBUS DP connection 11-16

Service data 1-14Servicing 12-1Set current D-5Setting the PROFIBUS DP address 2-10,

2-11Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

via SIMOCODE ES 2-11Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

via the addressing plug 2-11Shock resistance (sine pulse) D-2Short-circuit protection D-4Signal conditioner 1-15, 9-2, 9-13Signaling data to PROFIBUS DP 1-27SIMARIS manager 10-2SIMATIC PDM 4-4, 10-8SIMATIC PDM (PCS7) 10-2SIMATIC S7 1-26, 10-7SIMATIC S7-400 10-8SIMOCODE ES 1-18, 1-26, 2-2, 2-11, 4-1,

4-4, 8-18, 10-2, 10-5, 10-8, 12-2, 12-4, 12-7, B-37

SIMOCODE pro parameterization 1-25SIMOCODE pro S7 slave 10-3Slave modes of operation 10-5Slide control 1-19, 4-49Slider 1-12, 4-12, 4-46, 4-48Snap-on mounting 11-3Socket assignment table

- analog A-11- digital A-4

Sockets (analog) 1-27Sockets (digital) 1-27Soft reversing starter 4-12, 4-53, 4-54Soft starter 1-12, 4-12, 4-51, 4-52Soft starter control, 1-19Standard function modules 1-13Star contactor 4-28Star-delta circuit 1-10Star-delta connection 4-29Star-delta starter 4-12, 4-26

with reversal of the direction of rotation 4-12, 4-28, 4-30

Star-delta starters 1-12, 1-19, 4-25

SIMOCODE pro

Index-4 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-02

Index

SIMOCODE pro

Starting up parameter data 10-10Start-up parameterization 10-8, 10-10Start-up time 3-4Station status 1 10-13Station status 2 10-14Station status 3 10-14Statistics data 12-6Status messages 10-5, 10-9, 10-17Status signals/messages A-2STEP 7 user program 10-11Stop time 1-12Strip length 11-6Summation current transformer 1-2, 1-11,

1-17, 1-24Switch off time 3-4Switching from star to delta 4-25, 4-28Switching interval 4-13, 4-14, 4-26, 4-29,

4-32, 4-36, 4-38, 4-40Switching

the direction of rotation 4-19, 4-28, 4-35, 4-41, 4-53the direction of travel 4-47the speed 4-32, 4-35, 4-38, 4-41

System interface 1-16, 11-13System interface cover 1-18, 1-25, 11-12System interfaces 11-10, 11-14, D-3, D-5,

D-6, D-7

T

T module 3-11Tables A-1Technical Data D-1Telegram description 10-9Temperature module 1-2, 1-11, 1-17, 1-23,

1-24Temperature monitoring 1-11, 1-24, 3-11,

3-12Temperature sensors 1-2Test position feedback (TPF) 1-13Test/reset button D-3Thermistor protection 3-1, 3-2, 3-12, D-4Thermistor sensors 1-10, 3-11Tightening torques 11-6Time stamping in the fault memory 8-18Time synchronization 1-13Time to trip 1-14Timer 1-15, 9-2, 9-10Timestamping 1-13, 8-18Torque 4-49Transferring the parameters to the basic

device 2-9Transmitting data 10-4Tripping class 3-4, 3-5Tripping time 3-5Truth table for 2I/1O 9-6Truth table for 3I/1O 9-3

Truth table for 5I/2O 9-7Truth tables 1-15, 9-2Types of sensors 3-11Types of signal 9-17Types of signals 9-14

U

Unit replacement 1-25

V

Valve 1-12, 4-12, 4-44, 4-45Valve control 1-19Variants for slide control 4-49Voltage monitoring 1-11

W

Warnings 1-13, 1-14Watchdog 1-13Win SIMOCODE DP Converter 1-26Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files 1-26Wiring 11-1, 11-6

the detachable terminals 11-7, 11-8Writing data 10-3

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 Index-5

Index

SIMOCODE pro

Index-6 GWA 4NEB 631 6060-02

ToSIEMENS AGA&D CD MM3

92220 Amberg, Germany

Fax: ++49 9621/ 80-3337

SIMOCODE pro Manual

Did you notice an error while reading this manual? If so, please let us know using this form.We are grateful for your comments and suggestions.

Sender (please complete)

Name

Comany / department

Address

Telephone

Fax:

SIMOCODE pro

GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

SIMOCODE pro
GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

Automation and Drives

Low Voltage Controls and Distribution

Postfach 4848

D-90327 Nürnberg

w w w . s i e m e n s.com/simocode

Order No.: 3UF7970-0AA00-0

Safety and CommissioningInformation forPotentially Explosive Areas EIn this chapter

In this chapter you will find safety and commissioning information for potentially explosive areas. It is imperative that you observe this information when you have to protect motors in potentially explosive areas.

Target groups

This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:• planners and configurators• commissioners• maintenance and service personnel

Necessary knowledge

You need the following knowledge:• explosion protection• EN 60079-14/VDE 0165 for the installation of electrical apparatus in

potentially explosive/hazardous areas with gas• EN 50281-1-2 for the installation of electrical apparatus in potentially

explosive/hazardous areas with dust• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in underground mines

SIMOCODE proGWA 4NEB 631 6050-02 E-1

Safety and Commissioning Information for Potentially Explosive Areas

E.1 General

Information and standards

The increased danger in potentially explosive areas makes the careful observance of the following notes and standards necessary:• EN 60079-14/VDE 0165 for the installation of electrical apparatus in

potentially explosive/hazardous areas with gas• EN 50281-1-2 for the installation of electrical apparatus in potentially

explosive/hazardous areas with dust• VDE 0118 for the erection of electrical installations in underground mines

All 3UF7 devices are certified under Device Group I, Category “M2” (mining) and Device Group II, Category 2 in the area “GD” (areas in which explosive gas, steam, fog and air mixtures, as well as inflammable dust, are present):

Warning

All work for connecting, commissioning and maintenance must be carried out by qualified, responsible personnel. Unprofessional behavior can cause serious damage to persons and goods.

BVS 04 ATEX F 003 II (2) GD

BVS 04 ATEX F 003 I (M2)

SIMOCODE proE-2 GWA 4NEB 631 6050-02


E.2 Setting up and commissioning

Attention

Follow the operating instructions (enclosed with the devices)SIMOCODE pro

Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1Current measurement module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1Current/voltage measurement Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1module Digital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1

E.2.1 Setting the rated current of the motor

Configure the 3UF7 to the rated current of the motor (according to the type plate or design test certificate of the motor).

Attention

Note the release class/release characteristic curve of the 3UF7.Select the release class so that the motor is also thermally protected even with a blocked rotor.

Motors, cables and contactors must be designed for the selected release class.

Attention

Set the response of the overload protection to “Switch off”!



Example

Motor 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE = 11 s, IA/Ie = 5.5:

Fig. 5-1: Switch-off conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10

IA/Ie = 5.5

TE = 11 s



E.2.2 3UF70 with thermistor input

For the 3UF70 you can use a type A temperature sensor with a characteristic curve according to IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, part 303), DIN 44081 and DIN 44082. Depending on the number of sensors, this results in the following release and restart temperatures:

Fig. 5-2: Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)

Depending on the number of sensors, the following release and restart temperatures result in relation to the NFT (nominal functioning temperature of the sensor):

Table 5-1: Release and restart temperatures

The specified temperatures are limit values.

Attention

Set the response of the activated thermistor to “Switch off”!

Release temperature Restart temperature

3 sensors NFT + 4 K NFT - 7 K

6 sensors NFT - 5 K NFT - 20 K



E.2.3 Wiring of the sensor circuit

Caution

Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables. The use of conductors of the motor feeder or other main current cables is not permitted.Shielded control cables must be used if extremely inductive or capacitive interferences are to be expected due to parallel heavy current cables.

Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables:

Table 5-2: Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables

It is recommended to evaluate the short-circuit recognition.If the short-circuit recognition of the sensor cable is not evaluated, the sensor resistance must be measured with a suitable measuring device during commissioning or after modifications/maintenance work has been carried out (mounting, demounting the system). The sensor circuit must be checked for short circuits when the resistances are < 50 Ohm.

E.2.4 Short-circuit protection according to IEC 60947-4-1 for type of

coordination 2

The short-circuit protection must be ensured by separate overcurrent protection devices.

Caution

Note the respective maximum fuse protection of the contactor for type of coordination 2 when combining with other contactors.

Cable

cross section

Cable lengths at the thermistor input

without short-circuit

recognition

with short-circuit recognition 1)

2.5 mm2 2x 2800 m 2x 250 m

1.5 mm2 2x 1500 m 2x 150 m

0.5 mm2 2x 500 m 2x 50 m

1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit is recognized up to this maximum cable length.



E.2.5 Cable protection

Caution

Avoid impermissable high surface temperatures of the cables by correctly dimensioning the cross sections!Select a sufficient cross section - especially with heavy starting CLASS 20 to CLASS 40!

E.2.6 Test

Carry out a test when commissioning and cyclically every 12 months at the latest!The test comprises a complete function test. All three test phases (see below) must be carried out. These include hardware test, current measurement in all phases used and switching off the motor contactors (complete control chain with motor supply). The measured current values must be checked!

Attention:

The test must be carried out by a professional who knows the specified standards!

Test phases

• Phase 1: hardware test/lamp test (0 to 2 s):The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays are activated, as are the lamp controls. The contactor controls remain unchanged.

• Phase 2: hardware test results (2 to 5 s):If there is an fault, the “HW fault basic unit” fault is triggered.If there is no fault,

– the “GEN. FAULT” LED flashes if no main current is flowing– the “GEN. FAULT” LED flickers if main current flows in all three phases

(special case: for “1-phase load” in one phase).• Phase 3: relay test (> 5 s):

If a test is implemented with switch-off, the contactor controls are deactivated.



The following table shows the test phases carried out when the “TEST/RESET” button is pressed for the respective period of time:

Testphase

Status Without main current With main current

O.K. Fault *) O.K. Fault

Hardware test/lamp test

< 2s“DEVICE” LED Green Green Green Green

“GEN.FAULT” LED

Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged

Show QL*

Hardware test / lamp test result

2s - 5s“DEVICE” LED Green Red Green Red

“GEN.FAULT” LED

Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated

Relay test

> 5s“DEVICE” LED Green Red Green Red

“GEN.FAULT” LED

Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated

LED lit/activated LED flashing LED flickering LED off

*) “Fault” displayed after 2 s

Table 5-3: Statuses of the status LEDs/contactor controls during the test



E.2.7 Further safety information

Caution

Only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit or the 3UF730 monostable digital module may be used for the protection function!

Warning

The 3UF7 is not suitable for set-up in potentially explosive areas.The device may only be used in a switchgear cabinet which has at least the IP 4x degree of protection.When setting up in potentially explosive areas, the 3UF7 may not cause any danger of fire. Corresponding measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).

Caution

SIMOCODE pro C - basic unit 1:Short-term energy failures (voltage failures < approx. 50 ms) do not lead to any failure of the protection system.Long-term energy failures (voltage failures > approx. 50 ms) lead to deactivation of the relay outputs.

SIMOCODE pro V - basic unit 2:Short-term energy failures (voltage failures < approx. 200 ms) do not lead to any failure of the protection system.Long-term energy failures (voltage failures > approx. 200 ms) lead to deactivation of the relay outputs.

If the 3UF7 is in the “Automatic RESET” mode of operation, the reset is done automatically after the cooling down time has expired without pressing the “RESET” button. It must be guaranteed here via an additional ON button that the motor does not automatically start after tripping. If the 3UF7 is used in this case without additional thermistor protection, the motor may only be switched on by professionals.

Warning

The “Automatic RESET” mode of operation may not be used in applications in which an unexpected restart can lead to damage to persons or objects.

Attention:

The 3UF7 is not suitable for the load-side operation of frequency converters.



E.2.8 Ambient conditions

Range of the permitted ambient temperature:• Storage/transport: -40 °C to +80 °C• Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C

E.3 Maintenance and repair

The devices are maintenance-free.

Warning

Repairs on the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.

E.4 Guarantee

The guarantee presumes the observance of this safety and commissioning information of the operating instructions SIMOCODE pro

Basic device Order number 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1Current measurement module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1Current/voltage measurement Order number 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1moduleDigital module Order number 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1and the complete manual Order number 3UF7970-0AA0x-0

E.5 Further information

You can find further information on the 3UF7 in the LV10 Siemens catalog “Switchgear for Industry” or on the Internet athttp://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/cd.


http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi/cd

Documents

Simocode Manual